Cities Index.
Agenda packet

Roseville City Council
April 16, 2025

Document
Agenda packet
Meeting
April 16, 2025
Body
Roseville City Council
Pages
58
Original file
294.2 MB
Text extracted from the city's file for reading and search. Open the original on rosevilleca.api.civicclerk.com. That file is the official record.

3. Test values:
a. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections:
1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b. Insulation-resistance values shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data:
1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of the manufacturer’s published data.
2) Investigate values of insulation-resistance less than the allowable minimum.
c. Cable shall exhibit continuity.
d. Deviations in resistance between parallel conductors shall be investigated.

G. Low voltage molded case and insulated case circuit breakers:

1. Visual and mechanical inspection:
a. Compare equipment nameplate data with the Contract Documents. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect anchorage and alignment.
d. Verify the unit is clean.
e. Operate the circuit breaker to ensure smooth operation. f. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance by one of the following methods:
1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter.
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by the calibrated torque wrench method:
a) Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for proper foot-pound levels or NETA ATS tables.
g. Perform adjustments for final protective device settings in accordance with the coordination study.

2. Electrical tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter.

Field Electrical Acceptance Tests
16950-13 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16950 (DraftFinal) b. For breakers 100 A and higher:
1) Perform insulation-resistance tests for 1 minute on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with the circuit breaker closed and across each open pole:
a) Apply voltage in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data.
b) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of the manufacturer’s published data.
2) Perform a contact/pole-resistance test.
3) Determine long-time pickup and delay by primary current injection. 4) Determine short-time pickup and delay by primary current injection. 5) Determine ground-fault pickup and delay by primary current injection. 6) Determine instantaneous pickup value by primary current injection. 7) Perform minimum pickup voltage tests on shunt trip and close coils in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data.
8) Verify correct operation of any auxiliary features such as trip and pickup indicators, zone interlocking, electrical close and trip operation, trip-free, anti-pump function and trip unit battery condition:
a) Reset trip logs and indicators.
9) Verify operation of charging mechanism.

3. Test values:
a. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections:
1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data:
1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of the manufacturer’s published data.
c. Insulation-resistance values shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data:
1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of the manufacturer’s published data.
2) Investigate values of insulation-resistance less than the allowable minimum.
d. Microhm or DC millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the normal range as indicated in the manufacturer’s published data:
1) If the manufacturer’s data is not available, investigate any values which deviate from adjacent poles or similar breakers by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
e. Long-time pickup values shall be as specified, and the trip characteristic shall not exceed the manufacturer’s published time-current characteristic tolerance band including adjustment factors:
1) If the manufacturer’s curves are not available, trip times shall not exceed the value shown in NETA ATS tables.
f. Short-time pickup values shall be as specified, and the trip characteristic shall not exceed the manufacturer’s published time-current tolerance band. g. Ground fault pickup values shall be as specified, and the trip characteristic shall not exceed the manufacturer’s published time-current tolerance band.

Field Electrical Acceptance Tests
16950-14 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16950 (DraftFinal) h. Instantaneous pickup values shall be as specified and within the manufacturer’s published tolerances:
1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of the manufacturer’s published data.
i. Pickup values and trip characteristics shall be within the manufacturer’s published tolerances.
j. Determine energy reducing maintenance switch pickup value by primary current injection.
k. Breaker open, close, trip, trip-free, anti-pump, and auxiliary features shall function as designed.
l. Charging mechanism shall operate in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data.

H. Instrument transformers - current transformers:

1. Visual and mechanical inspection:
a. Compare equipment nameplate data with the Contract Documents. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Verify correct connection of transformers with system requirements. d. Verify that adequate clearances exist between primary and secondary circuit wiring.
e. Verify the unit is clean.
f. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods:
1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter.
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque wrench method:
a) Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for proper foot-pound levels or NETA ATS tables.
g. Verify that required grounding and shorting connections provide contact. h. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts and on moving and sliding surfaces.

2. Electrical tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter.
b. Perform insulation-resistance test of each current transformer and its secondary wiring with respect to ground at 1,000 VDC for 1 minute:
1) For solid state devices that cannot tolerate the applied voltage, follow the manufacturer’s recommendation.
c. Perform a polarity test of each current transformer in accordance with IEEE C57.13.1.
d. Perform a ratio verification test using the voltage or current method in accordance with IEEE C57.13.1.
e. Perform an excitation test on current transformers used for relaying applications in with accordance with IEEE C57.13.1.
f. Measure current circuit burdens at transformer terminals in accordance with IEEE C57.13.1.
g. When applicable, perform insulation-resistance tests on the primary winding with the secondary grounded:
1) Test voltages shall be in accordance with NETA ATS tables. h. Perform power-factor or dissipation-factor tests in accordance with the test equipment manufacturer’s published data.

Field Electrical Acceptance Tests
16950-15 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16950 (DraftFinal) i. Verify that current transformer secondary circuits are grounded and have only 1 grounding point in accordance with IEEE C57.13.3:
1) That grounding point should be located as specified by the Engineer in the Contract Documents.

3. Test values:
a. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections:
1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data:
1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of the manufacturer’s published data.
c. Insulation-resistance values of instrument transformers shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data:
1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of the manufacturer’s published data.
d. Polarity results shall agree with transformer markings. e. Ratio errors shall be in accordance with IEEE C57.13. f. Excitation results for current transformers shall match the curve supplied by the manufacturer or be in accordance with IEEE C57.13.1. g. Measured burdens shall be compared to instrument transformer ratings. h. If no evidence of distress or insulation failure is observed by the end of the total time of voltage application during the dielectric withstand test, the primary winding is considered to have passed the test.
i. Power-factor or dissipation-factor values shall be compared to the manufacturer’s published data:
1) In the absence of the manufacturer’s published data, use the test equipment manufacturer’s published data.
j. Test results shall indicate that the circuits have only 1 grounding point.

I. Instrument transformers - voltage transformers:

1. Visual and mechanical inspection:
a. Compare equipment nameplate data with the Contract Documents. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Verify correct connection of transformers with system requirements. d. Verify that adequate clearances exist between primary and secondary circuit wiring.
e. Verify the unit is clean.
f. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods:
1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter.
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque wrench method:
a) Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for proper foot-pound levels or NETA ATS tables.
g. Verify that required grounding and connections provide contact. h. Verify correct primary and secondary fuse sizes for voltage transformers. i. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts and on moving and sliding surfaces.
j. Perform as-left tests.

Field Electrical Acceptance Tests
16950-16 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16950 (DraftFinal)

2. Electrical tests - voltage transformers:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter.
b. Perform insulation-resistance tests winding-to-winding and winding-to-ground:
1) Test voltage shall be applied for 1 minute in accordance with NETA ATS requirements.
2) For solid state devices that cannot tolerate the applied voltage, follow the manufacturer’s recommendation.
c. Perform a polarity test on each voltage transformer to verify the polarity marks on H1- X1 relationship as applicable.
d. Perform a turns ratio test on all tap positions.
e. Measure voltage circuit burdens at transformer terminals. f. Perform a dielectric withstand test on the primary windings with the secondary windings grounded:
1) Dielectric voltage shall be in accordance with NETA ATS tables. 2) Apply the test voltage for 1 minute.
g. Perform power-factor or dissipation-factor tests in accordance with the test equipment manufacturer’s published data.
h. Verify that voltage transformer secondary circuits are grounded and have only 1 grounding point in accordance with IEEE C57.13.3:
1) That grounding point should be located as specified by the Engineer in the Contract Documents.

3. Test values:
a. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections:
1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data:
1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of the manufacturer’s published data.
c. Insulation-resistance values of instrument transformers shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data:
1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of the manufacturer’s published data.
d. Polarity results shall agree with transformer markings. e. Ratio errors shall be in accordance with IEEE C57.13. f. Measured burdens shall be compared to instrument transformer ratings. g. If no evidence of distress or insulation failure is observed by the end of the total time of voltage application during the dielectric withstand test, the primary winding is considered to have passed the test.
h. Power-factor or dissipation-factor values shall be compared to the manufacturer’s published data:
1) In the absence of the manufacturer’s published data, use the test equipment manufacturer’s published data.
i. Test results shall indicate that the circuits have only 1 grounding point.

J. Metering devices, microprocessor based:

1. Visual and mechanical inspection:
a. Compare equipment nameplate data with the Contract Documents.

Field Electrical Acceptance Tests
16950-17 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16950 (DraftFinal) b. Inspect meters and cases for physical damage.
c. Clean front panel.
d. Verify tightness of electrical connections.
e. Record the following:
1) Model number.
2) Serial number.
3) Firmware revision.
4) Software revision.
5) Rated control voltage.
f. Verify operation of display and indicating devices.
g. Record passwords.
h. Verify the unit is grounded in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
i. Set required parameters including instrument transformer ratios, system type, frequency, power demand methods/intervals, and communications requirements.

2. Electrical tests:
a. Apply voltage or current as appropriate to each analog input and verify correct measurement and indication.
b. Confirm correct operation and setting of each auxiliary input/output feature including mechanical relay, digital and analog.
c. After initial system energization, confirm measurements and indications are consistent with loads present.

3. Test values:
a. Nameplate data shall match the Contract Documents.
b. Tightness of electrical connections shall ensure a low resistance connection.
c. Display and indicating devices shall operate in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data.
d. Measurement and indication of applied voltages and currents shall be within the manufacturer’s published tolerances for accuracy. e. Auxiliary input/output features shall operate in accordance with the settings and the manufacturer’s published data.
f. Measure and indications shall be consistent with energized system loads.

K. Grounding systems:

1. Visual and mechanical inspection:
a. Inspect ground system for compliance with the Contract Documents and the NEC.
b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods:
1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter.
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque wrench method:
a) Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for proper foot-pound levels or NETA ATS tables.
d. Inspect anchorage.

2. Electrical tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter.

Field Electrical Acceptance Tests
16950-18 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16950 (DraftFinal) b. Perform fall of potential test or alternative test in accordance with IEEE 81 on the main grounding electrode or system.
c. Perform point-to-point tests to determine the resistance between the main grounding system and major electrical equipment frames, the system neutral and any derived neutral points.

3. Test values:
a. Grounding system electrical and mechanical connections shall be free of corrosion.
b. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections:
1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. c. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data:
1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of the manufacturer’s published data.
d. Resistance between the main grounding electrode and ground shall be as specified in Section 16060 - Grounding and Bonding.
e. Investigate point-to-point resistance values that exceed 0.5 ohm.

L. Rotating machinery, AC induction motors and generators:

1. Visual and mechanical inspection:
a. Compare equipment nameplate information with the Contract Documents. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.
d. Inspect air baffles, filter media, cooling fans, slip rings, brushes, and brush rigging.
e. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one or more of the following methods:
1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter.
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque wrench method:
a) Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for proper foot-pound levels or NETA ATS tables.
f. Manually rotate the rotor and check for problems with the bearings or shaft. g. Rotating equipment:
1) Operate at rated design load conditions.
2) Confirm that equipment is properly assembled.
3) Confirm the equipment moves or rotates in the proper direction. 4) Confirm shafting, drive elements, and bearings are installed and lubricated in accordance with proper tolerances.
5) Confirm that no unusual power consumption, lubrication temperatures, bearing temperatures, or other conditions are observed. h. Verify correct application of appropriate lubrication and lubrication systems. i. Verify that resistance temperature detector (RTD) circuits conform to that indicated on the Drawings.

2. Electrical tests - AC induction:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter.

Field Electrical Acceptance Tests
16950-19 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16950 (DraftFinal) b. Perform insulation-resistance test in accordance with IEEE 43:
1) On motors 200 horsepower and smaller, test duration shall be 1 minute. Calculate dielectric absorption ratio for 60/30-second periods.
2) On motors larger than 200 horsepower, test duration shall be 10 minutes. Calculate polarization index.
c. On machines rated at 2,300 volts and greater, perform dielectric withstand voltage tests in accordance with:
1) IEEE 95 for DC dielectric withstand voltage tests.
2) NEMA MG1 for AC dielectric withstand voltage tests.
d. Perform phase-to-phase stator resistance test on machines rated at 2,300 volts and greater.
e. Perform insulation-resistance test on insulated bearings in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data.
f. Test surge protection devices as specified in this Section. g. Test motor starter as specified in this Section.
h. Perform resistance tests on resistance temperature detector (RTD) circuits. i. Verify operation of motor space heater, if applicable. j. Perform vibration test while machine is running under load.

3. Test values:
a. Inspection:
1) Air baffles shall be clean and installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data.
2) Filter media shall be clean and installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data.
3) Cooling fans shall operate.
4) Slip ring alignment shall be within the manufacturer’s published tolerances.
5) Brush alignment shall be within the manufacturer’s published tolerances.
6) Brush rigging shall be within the manufacturer’s published tolerances. b. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections:
1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. c. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data:
1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of the manufacturer’s published data.
d. Airgap spacing and machine alignment shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data.
e. Recommended minimum insulation-resistance (IR1 min) test results in megohms shall be in accordance with NETA ATS tables.
1) Polarization index value shall not be less than 2.0. 2) Dielectric absorption ratio shall not be less than 1.4. f. If no evidence of distress or insulation failure is observed by the end of the total time of voltage application during the dielectric withstand test, the test specimen is considered to have passed the test.
g. Investigate phase-to-phase stator resistance values that deviate by more than 5 percent.

Field Electrical Acceptance Tests
16950-20 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16950 (DraftFinal) h. Power factor or dissipation factor values shall be compared to the manufacturer’s published data:
1) In the absence of the manufacturer’s published data, compare values of similar machines.
i. Tip-up values shall indicate no significant increase in power factor. j. If no evidence of distress, insulation failure, or waveform nesting is observed by the end of the total time of voltage application during the surge comparison test, the test specimen is considered to have passed the test. k. Bearing insulation-resistance measurements shall be within manufacturer’s published tolerances:
1) In the absence of the manufacturer’s published data, compare values of similar machines.
l. Test results of surge protection devices shall be as specified in this Section. m. Test results of motor starter equipment shall be as specified in this Section. n. RTD circuits shall conform to the design intent and machine protection device manufacturer’s published data.
o. Heaters shall be operational.
p. Vibration amplitudes of the uncoupled and unloaded machine shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data:
1) In the absence of the manufacturer’s published data, vibration amplitudes shall not exceed values in NETA ATS tables.
2) If values exceed those in the NETA ATS tables, perform a complete vibration analysis.

M. Motor starters, low voltage:

1. Visual and mechanical inspection:
a. Compare equipment nameplate information with the Contract Documents. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.
d. Verify the unit is clean.
e. Inspect contactors:
1) Verify mechanical operation.
2) Verify contact gap, wipe, alignment, and pressure is in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data.
f. Motor-running protection:
1) Verify overload element rating/motor protection settings are correct for its application.
2) If motor running protection is provided by fuses, verify correct fuse rating.
g. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods:
1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter.
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque wrench method:
a) Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for proper foot-pound levels or NETA ATS tables.
h. Lubrication requirements:
1) Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts. 2) Verify appropriate lubrication on moving and sliding surfaces.

Field Electrical Acceptance Tests
16950-21 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16950 (DraftFinal)

2. Electrical tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter.
b. Perform insulation-resistance tests for 1 minute on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with the starter closed, and across each open pole for 1 minute:
1) Test voltage shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data.
2) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of the manufacturer’s published data.
c. Test motor protection devices in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data.
d. Test circuit breakers as specified in this Section.
e. Perform operational tests by initiating control devices.

3. Test values:
a. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections:
1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data:
1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of the manufacturer’s published data.
c. Insulation-resistance values shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data:
1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of the manufacturer’s published data.
2) Investigate values of insulation-resistance less than the allowable minimum.
d. Motor protection parameters shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data.
e. Circuit breaker test results shall as be specified in this Section. f. Control devices shall perform in accordance with system design requirements.

N. Motor control centers, low voltage:

1. Visual and mechanical inspection:
a. Compare equipment nameplate data with the Contract Documents. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding and required clearances. d. Verify the unit is clean and shipping bracing, loose parts, and documentation shipped inside cubicles have been removed. e. Verify that circuit breaker/fuse sizes and types correspond to the approved Submittals and the coordination study.
f. Verify that current and voltage transformer ratios correspond to those indicated on the Drawings.
g. Verify that wiring connections are tight and that wiring is secure to prevent damage during routine operation of moving parts.
h. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods:
1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter.

Field Electrical Acceptance Tests
16950-22 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16950 (DraftFinal) 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by the calibrated torque wrench method:
a) Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for proper foot-pound levels or NETA ATS tables.
i. Verify operation and sequencing of interlocking systems:
1) Attempt closure on locked-open devices.
2) Attempt to open locked-closed devices.
3) Make/attempt key-exchanges in all positions.
j. Lubrication requirements:
1) Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts. 2) Verify appropriate lubrication on moving and sliding surfaces. k. Inspect insulators for evidence of physical damage or contaminated surfaces.
l. Verify correct barrier and shutter installation and operation. m. Exercise active components.
n. Inspect indicating devices for correct operation.
o. Verify that filters are in place and/or vents are clear. p. Perform visual and mechanical inspection of instrument transformers as specified in this Section.
q. Perform visual and mechanical inspection of surge arresters as specified in this Section.
r. Inspect control power transformers:
1) Inspect for physical damage, cracked insulation, broken leads, and tightness of connections, defective wiring, and overall general condition.
2) Verify that primary and secondary fuse/circuit breaker ratings match the Submittal Drawings.
3) Verify correction functioning of grounding contacts. s. Perform visual and mechanical inspection of motor control center components as specified in this Section.

2. Electrical tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter.
b. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each bus section, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute:
1) Perform test in accordance with NETA ATS tables.
c. Perform a dielectric withstand test on each bus section, each phase-to-ground with phases not under test grounded, in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data or NETA ATS tables. Apply the test voltage for 1 minute.
d. Perform electrical tests on instrument transformers as specified in this Section.
e. Perform ground-resistance tests:
1) Perform point-to-point tests to determine the resistance between the main grounding system and major electrical equipment frames, system neutral and derived neutral points.
f. Control power transformers:
1) Perform insulation-resistance tests, winding-to-winding and winding-to-ground:
a) Test voltages shall be in accordance with NETA ATS tables or as specified by the manufacturer.

Field Electrical Acceptance Tests
16950-23 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16950 (DraftFinal) 2) Perform secondary wiring integrity test:
a) Disconnect transformer at secondary terminals and connect secondary wiring to a rated secondary voltage source:
(1) Verify correct potential at all devices.
3) Verify correct secondary voltage by energizing primary winding with system voltage:
a) Measure secondary voltage with the secondary wiring
disconnected.
g. Verify operation of space heaters.
h. Perform electrical tests of motor control center components as specified in this Section.

3. Test values:
a. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections:
1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data:
1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of the manufacturer’s published data.
c. Insulation-resistance values for bus and control power transformers shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data:
1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of the manufacturer’s published data.
2) Investigate insulation values less than the allowable minimum. 3) Do not proceed with dielectric withstand voltage tests until insulation-resistance values are above minimum values.
d. Bus insulation shall withstand the over potential test voltage applied. e. Instrument transformer test values shall be as specified in this Section. f. Investigate grounding system point-to-point resistance values that exceed

0.5 ohm.
g. Meter accuracy shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data.
h. Control power transformers:
1) Insulation-resistance values of control power transformers shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data:
a) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of the manufacturer’s published data.
b) Investigate insulation values less than the allowable minimum. c) Do not proceed with dielectric withstand voltage tests until insulation-resistance values are above minimum values.
2) Secondary wiring shall be as indicated on the Drawings and specified in the Specifications.
3) Secondary voltage shall be as indicated on the Drawings. i. Heaters shall be operational.
j. Test values for motor control center components shall be as specified in this Section.

O. Variable frequency drive systems:

1. Visual and mechanical inspection:
a. Compare equipment nameplate data with the Contract Documents.

Field Electrical Acceptance Tests
16950-24 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16950 (DraftFinal) b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.
d. Verify the unit is clean.
e. Ensure vent path openings are free from debris and that heat transfer surfaces are clean.
f. Verify correct connections of circuit boards, wiring, disconnects, and ribbon cables.
g. Motor running protection:
1) Verify drive overcurrent setpoints are correct for their application. 2) If drive is used to operate multiple motors, verify individual overload element ratings are correct for their application.
3) Apply minimum and maximum speed setpoints. Verify setpoints are within limitations of the load coupled to the motor.
h. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods:
1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter.
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by the calibrated torque wrench method:
a) Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for proper foot-pound levels or NETA ATS tables.
i. Verify correct fuse sizing in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data.
j. Perform visual and mechanical inspection of input circuit breaker as specified in this Section.

2. Electrical tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with low resistance ohmmeter.
b. Test the motor overload relay elements by injecting primary current through the overload circuit and monitoring trip time of the overload element. c. Test for the following parameters in accordance with relay calibration procedures specified in NETA ATS, or as recommended by the manufacturer:
1) Input phase loss protection.
2) Input overvoltage protection.
3) Output phase rotation.
4) Overtemperature protection.
5) Direct current overvoltage protection.
6) Overfrequency protection.
7) Drive overload protection.
8) Fault alarm outputs.
d. Harmonic distortion measurements for both voltage and current is within the specification limits at the installed site.
e. Peak voltage at the motor terminations is less than 90 percent of the motor insulation dielectric withstand level.
f. Perform continuity tests on bonding conductors as specified in accordance with NETA ATS.
g. Perform start-up of drive in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data. Calibrate drive to the system’s minimum and maximum speed control signals.

Field Electrical Acceptance Tests
16950-25 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16950 (DraftFinal) h. Perform operational tests by initiating control devices:
1) Slowly vary drive speed between minimum and maximum. Observe motor and load for unusual noise or vibration.
2) Verify operation of drive from remote start/stop and speed control signals.
i. Perform electrical tests of input circuit breaker as specified in this Section. j. Measure fuse resistance.

3. Test values:
a. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections:
1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data:
1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of the manufacturer’s published data.
c. Overload test trip times at 300 percent of overload element rating shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s published time-current curve. d. Test values for input circuit breaker shall be as specified in this Section. e. Continuity of bonding conductors shall be in accordance with NETA ATS. f. Control devices shall perform in accordance with system requirements. g. Operational tests shall conform to system design requirements. h. Investigate fuse resistance values that deviate from each other by more than 15 percent.

P. Surge arresters, low-voltage:

1. Visual and mechanical inspection:
a. Compare equipment nameplate data with the Contract Documents. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances. d. Verify the arresters are clean.
e. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods:
1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter.
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by the calibrated torque wrench method:
a) Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for proper foot-pound levels or NETA ATS tables.
f. Verify that the ground lead on each device is individually attached to a ground bus or ground electrode.
g. Verify that stroke counter is correctly mounted and electrically connected, if applicable.
h. Record stroke counter reading.

2. Electrical tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter.
b. Perform an insulation-resistance test on each arrester, phase terminal-to-ground:
1) Apply voltage in accordance with manufacturer’s published data. 2) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of the manufacturer’s published data.

Field Electrical Acceptance Tests
16950-26 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16950 (DraftFinal) c. Test grounding connection as specified in this Section.

3. Test values:
a. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections:
1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data:
1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of the manufacturer’s published data.
c. Insulation-resistance values shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s published data:
1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of the manufacturer’s published data.
2) Investigate insulation values less than the allowable minimum. d. Resistance between the arrester ground terminal and the ground system shall be less than 0.5 ohm.

Q. Fiber-optic cables:

1. Visual and mechanical inspection:
a. Compare cable, connector, and splice data with the Contract Documents. b. Inspect cable and connections for physical and mechanical damage. c. Verify that connectors and splices are correctly installed.

2. Optical tests:
a. Perform cable length measurement, fiber fracture inspection, and construction defect inspection using an optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR):
1) OTDR test performed on fiber cables less than 100 meters shall be performed with the aid of a launch cable.
2) Adjust OTDR pulse width settings to a maximum setting of 1/1,000th of the cable length or 10 nanoseconds.
b. Perform connector and splice integrity test using an optical time domain reflectometer.
c. Perform cable attenuation loss measurement with an optical power loss test set:
1) Perform attenuation tests with an optical loss test set capable and calibrated to show anomalies of 0.1 dB as a minimum.
2) Test multimode fibers at 850 nanometer and 1,300 nanometer. 3) Test single mode fibers at 1,310 nanometer and 1,550 nanometer. d. Perform connector and splice attenuation loss measurement from both ends of the optical cable with an optical power loss test set:
1) At the conclusion of all outdoor splices at 1 location, and before they are enclosed and sealed, splices shall be tested with OTDR at the optimal wavelengths (850 and 1,300 for multimode, 1,310 and 1,550 for single mode), in both directions. Splices shall be tested for integrity as well as attenuation.
e. Perform fiber links integrity and attenuation tests using each link shall be an OTDR and an optical loss test set:
1) OTDR traces shall be from both directions on each fiber at the 2 optimal wavelengths, 850 nanometer, and 1,300 nanometer for multimode fibers.

Field Electrical Acceptance Tests
16950-27 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16950 (DraftFinal) 2) Optical loss testing shall be done with handheld test sets in 1 direction at the 2 optimal wavelengths for the appropriate fiber type.

Test equipment shall equal or exceed the accuracy and resolution of Agilent/HP 8147 high performance OTDR.

3. Test values:
a. Cable and connections shall not have been subjected to physical or mechanical damage.
b. Connectors and splices shall be installed in accordance with industry standards.
c. Optical time domain reflectometer signal should be analyzed for excessive connection, splice, or cable backscatter by viewing the reflected power/distance graph.
d. Attenuation loss measurement shall be expressed in dB/km. Losses shall be within the manufacturer’s recommendations when no local site specifications are available.
e. Individual fusion splice losses shall not exceed 0.1 dB. Measurement results shall be recorded, validated by trace, and filed with the records of the respective cable runs.

R. Copper Ethernet cable installation testing:

1. Pre-installation:
a. Immediately prior to installation, verify that cable to be installed matches that which was submitted.
b. Verify that no damage has been done to the cable during shipping or handling.
c. Inspect cable for physical and mechanical damage.
d. Engineer shall be notified if a cable fails to meet inspection and the cable shall not be installed unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

2. Post-installation:
a. Prior to copper Ethernet cable termination, perform cable end-to-end continuity validation testing on installed cables, conductor pairs and cable shields using toner and probe kit. Any cable that fails testing shall be removed and replaced.
b. Inspect equipment outlet connectors for damage and ensure connectors hold tightly in field device ports.

3. Test equipment:
a. Certification equipment used for the testing shall be capable of verifying twisted pair cable installation with end-to-end continuity testing. b. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by the test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.
c. Manufacturers: The following or equal:
1) Fluke Networks, IntelliTone Pro 200 Toner and Probe Kit, MT-8200-60-KIT.
d. Permanent link testing requirements: As specified in Section 17950 - Commissioning for Instrumentation and Controls.

Field Electrical Acceptance Tests
16950-28 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/16950 (DraftFinal)

3.04 CLEANING
A. Dispose of testing expendables.

B. Vacuum cabinets.

C. Sweep clean surrounding areas.

END OF SECTION
Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems 17050-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17050 (DraftFinal) SECTION 17050

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS CONTROL AND

INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Process control and instrumentation systems requirements for common components including installation, including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Hardware.
b. Software.
c. Programming.
d. Testing.
e. Commissioning.

2. Loop drawings:
a. Provide complete loop drawings for all systems, including packaged equipment furnished as part of a vendor furnished package, and pre-purchased equipment.
b. The form, minimum level of detail, and format for the loop drawings must match that of the sample loop drawings included in the Contract Documents.
c. Owner and Engineer are not responsible for providing detailed loop diagrams for Contractor furnished equipment.

3. Requirements of the Instrumentation and Control Specifications apply to all Instrumentation and Control Work specified in Technical Sections, including packaged mechanical systems, LCPs, VCPs, etc.

4. Carollo Engineers Inc will be providing the PLC programming and SCADA programming; and is referred to as the programmer in this section.

B. Contract Drawings:

1. Schematic diagrams:
a. Use schematic diagrams in conjunction with the descriptive operating sequence in the Technical Sections to furnish a coordinated and fully functional control system.
b. Schematic diagrams show control function only.
1) Incorporate other necessary functions for proper operation and protection of the system.
c. Controls are indicated on the Drawings as de-energized. d. Add relays, where required, to provide necessary contacts for the control system or where needed to function as interposing relays for control voltage coordination, equipment coordination, or control system voltage drop considerations.
e. Mount devices shown on motor controller schematic diagrams in the controller compartment enclosure, unless otherwise noted or indicated on the Drawings.

Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems 17050-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17050 (DraftFinal)

1.02 REFERENCES
A. Abbreviations:

1. ACB: Automatic current balance.

2. ATS: Automatic Transfer Switch.

3. CCS: The PCS central computer system (CCS) consisting of computers and software. The personal computer-based hardware and software system that includes the operator interface, data storage, data retrieval, archiving, alarming, historian, reports, trending, and other higher level control system software and functions.

4. DPDT: Double-pole, double-throw.

5. ECP: Electronic circuit protector.

6. ES: Ethernet Switch.

7. FAT: Factory acceptance test also known as Source Test.

8. HART: Highway addressable remote transducer.

9. HMI: Human machine interface is a software application that presents information to an operator or user about the state of a process, and to accept and implement the operators control instructions. Typically, information is displayed in a graphical format.

10. HOA: Hand-Off-Auto control function that is totally PLC based. In the Hand mode, equipment is started or stopped, valves are opened or closed through operator direction under the control of the PLC software. In the Auto mode, equipment is started or stopped, and valves are opened or closed through a control algorithm within the PLC software. In the Off mode, the equipment is prohibited from responding from the PLC control.

11. I/O: Input/Output.

12. ICSC: Instrumentation and control system contractor: Subcontractor who specializes in the design, construction, fabrication, software development, installation, testing, and commissioning of industrial instrumentation and control systems.

13. IJB: Instrument junction boxes: A panel designed with cord sets to easily remove, replace, or relocate instrument signals.

14. IP: Internet protocol or ingress protection.

15. LAN: Local area network: A control or communications network that is limited to the physical boundaries of the facility.

16. LCP: Local control panel: Operator interface panel that may contain an HMI, pilot type control devices, operator interface devices, control relays, etc. and does not contain a PLC or RIO.

17. LOI: Local Operator Interface is an operator interface device consisting of an alphanumeric or graphic display with operator input functionality. The LOI is typically a flat panel type of display mounted on the front of an enclosure with either a touch screen or tactile button interface.

18. LOR: Local-Off-Remote control function. In the Remote mode, equipment is started or stopped, and valves are opened or closed through the PLC based upon the selection of the HOA. In the Local mode, equipment is started or stopped, valves are opened or closed based upon hardwired control circuits completely independent of the PLC with minimum interlocks and permissive conditions. In the Off mode, the equipment is prohibited from responding to any control commands.

Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems 17050-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17050 (DraftFinal)

19. NJB: Network junction box. An enclosure that contains multiple access points to various networks within the facility. Networks could be Ethernet, Ethernet/IP, Fieldbus, RIO, etc.

20. P&ID: Process and instrumentation diagram.

21. PC: Personal computer.

22. PCIS: Process control and instrumentation system: Includes the entire instrumentation system, the entire control system, and all of the Work specified in the Instrumentation and Control Specifications and depicted on the Instrumentation Drawings. This includes all the PCS and instruments and networking components as well as the various servers, workstations, thin clients, etc.

23. PCM: Process control module: An enclosure containing any of the following devices: PLC, RTU, or RIO.

24. PCS: Process Control System: A general name for the computerized system that gathers and processes data from equipment and sensors and applies operational controls to the process equipment. It includes the PLCs and/or RIOs, LOIs, HMIs, both LCPs, VCPs and all data management systems accessible to staff.

25. PJB: Power junction box: An enclosure with terminal blocks that distribute power to multiple instruments.

26. PLC: Programmable logic controller.

27. PS: Power supply.

28. RIO: Remote I/O device for the PLC consisting of remote I/O racks or remote I/O blocks.

29. RTU: Remote telemetry unit: A controller typically consisting of a PLC, and a means for remote communications. The remote communications devices typically are radios, modems, etc.

30. SCADA: Supervisory control and data acquisition system: A general name for the computerized system that gathers and processes data from sensors and equipment located outside of the facility, such as wells, lift stations, metering stations, etc.

31. SELV: Safety extra-low voltage.

32. SFP: Small form-factor pluggable.

33. SPDT: Single-pole, double-throw.

34. SPST: Single-pole, single-throw.

35. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.

36. VCP: Vendor control panel: Control panels that are furnished with particular equipment by a vendor other than the ICSC. These panels may contain PLCs, RIO, LOI, HMI, etc.

37. WAN: Wide area network: A control or communications network that extends beyond the physical boundaries of the facility.

B. Standards:

1. American Petroleum Institute (API):
a. RP 550 - Manual on Installation of Refinery Instruments and Control Systems; Part II-Process Stream Analyzers; Section 5-Oxygen Analyzers. b. RP 551 - Process Measurement Instrumentation.

2. International Organization for Standardization (ISO):
a. 9001 - Quality Management Systems - Requirements.

3. International Society of Automation (ISA):
a. 5.1 - Instrumentation Symbols and Identification.

Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems 17050-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17050 (DraftFinal) b. 5.4 - Instrument Loop Diagrams.
c. 20 Instrument Forms Plus Pro-Combo-Enterprise Version (Microsoft SQL Server Express Database Software based).

4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).

5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).

6. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).

7. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
a. 508 - Standard of Safety for Industrial Control Equipment. b. 508A - Standard of Safety for Industrial Control Panels.

1.03 TERMINOLOGY
A. The words and terms listed below are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in this Section, have the indicated meaning.

1. 2-Wire transmitter (loop powered): A transmitter that derives its operating power supply from the signal transmission circuit and requires no separate power supply connections. As used in this Section, 2-wire transmitter refers to a transmitter that provides a signal such as 4 to 20 mA 24 VDC regulation of a signal in a series circuit with an external 24 VDC driving potential:
a. Fieldbus communications signal or both.

2. Control circuit: Any circuit operating at 120 volts alternating current (VAC) or direct current (VDC) or less, whose principal purpose is the conveyance of information (including performing logic) and not the conveyance of energy for the operation of an electrically powered device.

3. Digital bus: A communication network, such as PROFIBUS, Foundation Fieldbus, or DeviceNet, allowing instruments and devices to transmit data, control functions, and diagnostic information.

4. Instrument: A measurement device that includes a sensor for taking the measurement and one or both of the following:
a. A local display.
b. A device for communicating the measurement to a remote location such as a PLC or DCS.

5. Modifications: Changing, extending, interfacing to, removing, or altering an existing circuit.

6. Panel: An instrument support system that may be a flat surface, a partial enclosure, or a complete enclosure for instruments and other devices used in process control systems.

7. Power circuit: Any circuit operating at 90 volts (AC or DC) or more, whose principal purpose is the conveyance of energy for the operation of an electrically powered device.

8. Powered transmitters: A transmitter that requires a separate power source (120 VAC, 240 VAC, etc.) in order for the transmitter to develop its signal. As used in this Section, the produced signal may be a 4 to 20 mA 24 VDC signal, a digital bus communications signal, or both.

9. Programmer: Responsible for PLC programming and SCADA/HMI software configuration.

10. RS-485: RS-485 is also known as TIA-485 or EIA-485, is a standard defining the electrical characteristics of drivers and receivers for use in serial communications system. Electrical signaling is balanced, and multipoint Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems 17050-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17050 (DraftFinal) systems are supported, can be used with data rates up to 10 Mbit/s or at lower speeds distances up to 1,000 meters (4,000 feet).

11. Signal circuit: Any circuit operating at less than 50 VAC or VDC, which conveys analog information or digital communications information.

1.04 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. The requirements for Delegated Design are specified in the Technical Sections.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. General:

1. Adhere to the wiring numbering scheme as specified in Section 16075 - Identification for Electrical Systems throughout the Project:
a. Uniquely number each wire.
b. Wire numbers must appear on Equipment Drawings.

2. Some items of Work are represented schematically, and are designated for the most part by numbers, as derived from criteria in ISA-5.1:
a. Employ the nomenclature and numbers designated in this Section and indicated on the Drawings exclusively throughout Shop Drawings, datasheets, and similar Submittals.
b. Replace any other symbols, designations, and nomenclature unique to a manufacturer’s, Supplier’s, or Subcontractor’s standard methods with those identified in this Section and indicated on the Drawings.

B. Specific Submittal requirements:

1. Control Panel Drawings:
a. General Requirements:
1) Submit panel, enclosure, console, furniture, and cabinet layout drawings for all items provided.
2) Use equipment and instrument tags as depicted on the P&IDs for all Submittals.
3) Nameplates and Wire Labeling:
a) Nameplate legend including text, letter size, materials, and colors.
b) As specified in Section 16075 - Identification for Electrical Systems or as indicated on the Drawings.
4) Structural Requirements:
a) Anchoring method and leveling criteria, including manufacturer’s recommendations for the Project site seismic criteria.
b) Weight.
5) Clearly show modifications to existing circuits:
a) Show existing unmodified wiring to clearly depict the functionality and electrical characteristics of the complete modified circuits.
b. Required for materials and equipment listed in this and other Technical Sections.
c. Front, side, rear, internal, external elevations, and top and bottom views, showing all dimensions and all to scale.
1) Locations of conduit entrances and access plates.
2) Component layout and identification.

Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems 17050-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17050 (DraftFinal) 3) Complete and detailed bills of materials:
a) Including quantity, description, manufacturer, and part number for each assembly or component for each control panel.
b) Include all items within an enclosure.
4) Requirements for physical separation between control system components and 120 VAC, 480 VAC, and medium-voltage power cables.
5) Complete grounding requirements for each system component including any requirements for PLCs, process LANs, and Control System equipment.
6) PLC rack and card layout:
a) Provide a count of current I/O allocation.
b) Future I/O allocation.
c) Quantity of spares provided.
7) NEMA rating.
8) Material and finish.

2. Schematics and Wiring Diagrams:
a. General Requirements:
1) Submit panel wiring diagrams for every panel that contains wiring. 2) Use equipment and instrument tags as depicted on the P&IDs for all Submittals.
3) Nameplates and Wire Labeling:
a) As specified in Section 16075 - Identification for Electrical Systems or as indicated on the Drawings.
4) Clearly show modifications to existing circuits:
a) Show existing unmodified wiring to clearly depict the functionality and electrical characteristics of the complete modified circuits.
b. Include the following information:
1) Name of panel.
2) Wiring sizes and types.
3) Terminal strip numbers.
4) Terminal identification for device and field connections. 5) Wire tags and labels.
6) Functional name and manufacturer’s designation for items to which wiring are connected.
7) Set points for relays and control or alarm contact settings. c. Incorporate equipment manufacturer’s Shop Drawing information into the schematic diagrams in order to document the entire control system.

3. Loop drawings:
a. General Requirements:
1) Submit loop drawings for every analog, discrete, fieldbus signal, vendor supplied equipment packages, and control panels. a) Includes monitoring, alarming, interlocks, and control devices. 2) Use equipment and instrument tags as depicted on the P&IDs for all Submittals.
3) Show and identify each component of each loop or system using requirements and symbols from ISA-5.4.
4) Provide Drawings for every instrumentation loop system:
a) Furnish a separate Drawing sheet for each system or loop diagram.

Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems 17050-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17050 (DraftFinal) 5) Nameplates and Wire Labeling:
a) As specified in Section 16075 - Identification for Electrical Systems or as indicated on the Drawings.
6) Clearly show modifications to existing circuits:
a) Show existing unmodified wiring to clearly depict the functionality and electrical characteristics of the complete modified circuits.
7) Provide loop drawings in the format indicated in the Contract Drawings.
b. Provide a complete index in the front of each bound volume:
1) Index the loop drawings by systems or process areas. c. In addition to the ISA-5.4 requirements, show the following details:
1) Functional name of each loop.
2) Reference name, drawing, and loop diagram numbers for any signal continuing off the loop diagram sheet.
3) Show all terminal numbers, regardless of the entity providing the equipment.
4) MCC panel, circuit, and breaker numbers for power feeds to the loops and instrumentation.
5) Terminal assignments associated with every manhole, pull-box, junction box, conduit, and panel through which the loop circuits pass. 6) Show vendor control panel, instrument panel, conduit, junction box, equipment and PCS terminations, termination identification, wire numbers and colors, power circuits, and ground identifications. 7) Cables required for communication requirements.

4. PLC I/O List:
a. A complete listing of the PCS system point I/O database:
1) Include for each data point relevant parameters such as range, contact orientation, limits, incremental limits, I/O hardware address, and PLC assignment.
2) Organize on a site-by-site basis and separate by point type. 3) In addition to the active l/O points, list the implemented spare l/O points and the available l/O points remaining on each card, as well as other defined future points specified or shown.
4) Upon completion of the Work, update I/O lists to indicate the final as-built configuration of the systems:
a) Organize as-built I/O list on a site-by-site basis, separated by equipment and point type.

5. Instrument Datasheets:
a. The datasheets provided with the instrument specifications are preliminary and are not complete but are provided to assist with the completion of final instrument datasheets. Additional datasheets may be required. b. Furnish fully completed datasheets for each instrument and component according to ISA-20 Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments, Primary Elements and Control Valves. c. Format: Provide datasheets in Microsoft Word or Microsoft Excel. 1) Features and options that are furnished.
d. Provide completed datasheet as specified in the Technical Sections and for each control system component.

Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems 17050-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17050 (DraftFinal)

6. Instrument Installation Drawings:
a. Provide instrument installation, mounting, and anchoring details for components and assemblies, including access requirements and conduit connection or entry details.
b. Each installation shall be identified by the equipment or instrument by tag number.
c. Provide certification by the instrument manufacturer that the proposed installation is in accordance with the instrument manufacturer’s recommendations and is fully warrantable.
d. Provide, at a minimum, the following contents for each detail:
1) Necessary sections and elevation views required to define instrument location by referencing tank, building, or equipment names and numbers, and geographical qualities such as north, south, east, west, basement, first floor, etc.
2) Ambient temperature and humidity where the instrument is to be installed.
3) Corrosive qualities of the environment where the instrument is to be installed.
4) Hazardous rating of the environment where the instrument is to be installed.
5) Process line pipe or tank size, service, and material. 6) Process tap elevation and location.
7) Upstream and downstream straight pipe lengths between instrument installation and pipe fittings and valves.
8) Routing of tubing and identification of supports.
9) Mounting brackets, stands, anchoring devices, and sunshades. 10) Conduit entry size, number, location, and delineation between power and signal.
11) NEMA ratings of enclosures and components.
12) Clearances required for instrument servicing.
13) List itemizing manufacturer makes, model numbers, quantities, lengths required, and materials of each item required to support the implementation of the detail.

7. Product data:
a. Provide a technical brochure or bulletin (“cutsheet”) for each instrument or equipment on the project labeled with equipment and instrument tags as depicted on the P&IDs.
1) Submit with the corresponding datasheets.
2) Organization: Index product data in the Submittal by systems or loops. b. Engineering data:
1) Test data and performance curves, when applicable.
c. Manufacturer’s technical reference manuals.

8. Commissioning Submittals:
a. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.
b. Manufacturer representative qualifications.
c. Manufacturer certificates.
d. Test plans.
e. Test reports.
f. Owner Training Submittals.

Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems 17050-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17050 (DraftFinal) g. Operation and maintenance manuals.
1) Organize the operation and maintenance manuals for each process in the following manner:
a) Section A - Process and Instrumentation Diagrams.
b) Section B - Control Panel Drawings.
c) Section D - Schematics and Wiring Diagrams.
d) Section E - Loop Drawings.
e) Section F - Network Diagrams.
f) Section G - PLC I/O List.
g) Section I - Instrument Datasheets.
h) Section J - Instrument Installation Drawings.
i) Section K - Product Data.
j) Section L - Sizing Calculations.
k) Section M - Test Results.
l) Section N - Operational Manual.
m) Section O - Spare Parts List.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacture instruments at facilities certified to the quality standards of ISO 9001.

B. Provide equipment listed by and bearing the label of UL or of an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer and the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

C. The ICSC must have their own operating UL listed panel fabrication facility.

1. Panels must be fabricated at this facility and meet UL 508/508A requirements.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Upon receipt of instruments in the field:

1. Outside of the package: Prominently display tag number identification.

2. On each instrument: Provide a nameplate as specified in this Section.

1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

B. Area classifications:

1. Furnish enclosures that match the area classifications as specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

1.09 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Project PCIS overview meeting (kickoff meeting):

1. Contractor leads the meeting.

2. Timing:
a. Prior to start of ICSC and Programmer Work.

3. Attendees:
a. Engineer, Owner, ICSC, and Programmer.
b. Contractor.
c. Electrical subcontractor.

Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems 17050-10 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17050 (DraftFinal) d. Manufacturers furnishing major pieces of equipment must attend, including, but not limited to:
1) Vendor control panels.
2) Chemical feed systems.
3) Motor control centers.
4) Variable frequency drives.

4. Agenda:
a. Meeting purpose:
1) Ensure parties listed in 3.a above are aware of and in agreement to the details of the items listed below in b. thru k.
b. Review entire project.
c. Review equipment lists.
d. Review control philosophy.
e. Review schedules.
f. Review Submittal requirements.
g. Discuss Construction activities
h. Discuss Commissioning activities
i. Safety and security.
j. Action items.
k. Next meeting.

B. Construction Meetings:

1. Contractor leads the meeting.

2. Timing:
a. As necessary and determined by the Contractor.

3. Attendees:
a. As the Contractor sees fit but the Owner and Engineer must be notified (invited to) 2 weeks prior of all meetings; unless the meeting is an emergency.

4. Agenda:
a. Determined by the Contractor.

5. Final review meeting:
a. Contractor leads the meeting.
b. Timing:
1) After initial completion of configuration work.
2) Prior to the Source Test.
c. Attendees:
1) Engineer, Owner, Programmer, and ICSC.
d. Agenda:
1) Meeting purpose:
a) Ensure parties listed in 5.c above are aware of and in agreement to the details of the items listed below in 2. thru 9. 2) Review the PLC and SCADA system configuration.
3) Review the PLC and SCADA HMI system database.
4) Review the control schemes.
5) Review the PLC HMI and SCADA HMI displays.
6) Review the report formats.
7) Safety and security.
8) Action items.
9) Next meeting.
e. Make final format revisions after this review.

Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems 17050-11 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17050 (DraftFinal) f. Additional requirements as specified in the following:
1) Section 17100 - Control Strategies.
2) Section 17101A - Specific Control Strategies.
3) Section 17720 - Control Systems: Programmable Logic Controllers.

6. Pre-Commissioning Meeting:
a. Contractor leads the meeting.
b. Timing:
1) 1 week prior to commissioning commences.
c. Attendees:
1) Owner, Engineer, ICSC, Programmer, and packaged equipment vendors.
d. Agenda:
1) Meeting Purpose:
a) Discuss and agree to Who, What, When, Why, Where, and How as detailed in the Commissioning plan.
(1) Commissioning plan to contain but not limited to:
(a) Procedure.
(b) Forms/Documentation.
(c) Schedule.
(d) Resourcing.

7. Commissioning Meetings:
a. Contractor leads the meeting.
b. Timing:
1) As necessary and determined by the Contractor.
c. Attendees:
1) As the Contractor sees fit but the Owner and Engineer must be notified (invited to) 2 weeks prior of all meetings; unless the meeting is an emergency.
d. Agenda:
1) Determined by the Contractor.

8. Post Commissioning Meeting (Lessons Learned):
a. Contractor leads the meeting.
b. Timing:
1) Determined by the Contractor.
c. Attendees:
1) Owner, Engineer, ICSC, Programmer.
d. Agenda:
1) Results of Commissioning.
2) Lessons Learned.
a) Successes.
b) Opportunities to improve.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Furnish meters, instruments, and other components that are the most recent field proven models marketed by their manufacturers at the time of Submittal of the Shop Drawings unless otherwise specified to match existing equipment.

Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems 17050-12 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17050 (DraftFinal)

2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Non-conditioned spaces:

1. Provide additional temperature conditioning equipment to maintain equipment in non-conditioned spaces subject to these ambient temperatures, between 60 and 90 degrees Fahrenheit.

B. Outdoor installations:

1. Provide electrical, instrumentation and control equipment suitable for operation in the ambient conditions where the equipment is located.

2. Provide heating, cooling, and dehumidifying devices incorporated into and included with electrical equipment, instrumentation and control panels to maintain the enclosures within the rated environmental operating ranges as specified in the Sections for the equipment.
a. Assume an external temperature range of -5 to 120 degrees Fahrenheit.

C. This facility includes classified areas:

1. As specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

2. Provide enclosures suitable for the area classification.

3. Where suitable enclosures are not available, utilize other methods such as intrinsic safety barriers.

D. Unless otherwise specified, furnish individual instruments that have a minimum accuracy of within 0.5 percent of full scale and a minimum repeatability of within

0.25 percent of full scale.

E. Discrete circuit configuration:

1. Configure discrete control circuits to fail safe, on loss of continuity or loss of power.

2. Alarm contacts: Fail to the alarm condition.

3. Control contacts fail to the inoperative condition unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

F. Grounding:

1. Analog signal cables shields shall only be grounded at a single point in the loop. Unless otherwise noted, ground signal cable shields at control panel.

2. For communication and data line signal cable shields and drain wires should be grounded at both ends of the cable.

3. Insulate the shielding and exposed drain wire for each signal cable with heat-shrink tubing.

4. Terminate the signal cable shield on a dedicated grounding terminal block.

5. Provide isolating amplifiers within control panels for field equipment possessing a grounded input or output, except when the panel circuit is galvanically isolated.

G. Terminal blocks:

1. Schematics do not reflect the actual conductor routing. Add intermediate terminal in enclosures and equipment as needed based on the actual conductor routing.

Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems 17050-13 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17050 (DraftFinal) H. Signal transmission:

1. Analog signals:
a. Furnish analog measurements and control signals that vary in direct linear proportion to the measured variable, unless otherwise indicated. b. Furnish electrical analog signals outside control panels that are 4 to 20 mA 24 VDC, except as indicated.
c. Electrically or optically isolate analog signals from other signals. d. Furnish regulated analog signals that are not affected by changes in supply voltage or load resistance within the unit’s rating. e. Maintain the total 4 to 20 mA loop impedance to 10 percent below the published value at the loop operating voltage.
f. Where necessary, reduce loop impedance by providing current-to-current (I/I) isolation amplifiers for signal re-transmission.

2. Discrete input signals:
a. As indicated in the controller hardware specification.

3. Discrete output signals:
a. Dry contacts or TRIAC outputs (with express written approval by the Engineer) as needed to coordinate with the field device. b. Provide external terminal block mounted fuse with blown fuse indication for discrete outputs.
c. Provide interposing relays for discrete outputs for voltage and/or current compatibilities.
d. Provide interposing relays as required for functionality of the control circuit.

4. Signal performance and design criteria:
a. Stability:
1) After controls have taken corrective action, oscillation of the final control element shall not exceed 2 cycles per minute or a magnitude of motion of 0.5 percent of full travel.
b. Response:
1) Any change in setpoint or controlled variable shall produce a corrective change in position of the final control element and stabilized within 30 seconds.
c. Agreement:
1) Setpoint indication of controlled variable and measured indication of controlled variable shall agree within 3 percent of full scale over a 6:1 operating range.
d. Repeatability:
1) For any repeated magnitude of control signal, from either an increasing or decreasing direction, the final control element shall take a repeated position within 0.5 percent of full travel regardless of force required to position the final element.
e. Sensitivity:
1) Controls shall respond to a setpoint deviations and measured variable deviations within 1.0 percent of full scale.
f. Performance:
1) Instruments and control devices shall perform in accordance with the manufacturers’ specifications.

Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems 17050-14 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17050 (DraftFinal)

2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide flow conditioning devices or other required accessories as needed to meet the accuracy requirements in the Contract Documents.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Field instruments installation:

1. Install field instruments as specified in the Contract Documents, API RP 550 and RP 551, and the manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Mount field instruments so that they can be easily read, readily approached, and easily serviced, and so they do not restrict access to mechanical equipment:
a. Mount field instruments on a pipe stand or local panel, if they are not directly mounted, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. b. Provide sun shields for field electronic instruments, panels, and enclosures located outdoors. Sun shields shall include standoffs to allow air gap between shield and equipment.
c. Orient LED, LCD, or other readout screens north to minimize sun glare and reduce potential of sun damage.

3. Make connections from rigid conduit systems to field instruments with PVC coated flexible conduit:
a. Type of flexible conduit required for the area classification:
1) Area classification as specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.
b. Maximum length of 18 inches.

4. Connect field instruments with cable as specified in the Electrical Specifications, except when the manufacturer requires the use of special cable, or otherwise specified in this Section:
a. Special cable applications shall be in accordance with the NEC.

5. Verify the correctness of each installation:
a. Polarity of electric power and signal connections.

6. Ensure process connections are free of leaks.

B. Process sensing lines and air tubing:

1. Install individual tubes parallel and/or perpendicular to and near the surfaces from which they are supported.

2. Provide supports for rigid tubing at intervals of not more than 3 feet.

3. Slope horizontal runs of instrument tubing at a minimum of 1/16-inch per foot to allow for draining of any condensate.

4. Bends:
a. Make bends for parallel lines symmetrical.
b. Make bends without deforming or thinning the walls of the tubing.

5. Square-cut and clean ends of tubing before being inserted in the fittings.

6. Provide bulkhead fittings at panels requiring pipe and/or tubing entries.

Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems 17050-15 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17050 (DraftFinal)

7. Use stainless steel tubing for piping hard piped from the air header, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or not compatible with the fluids or atmosphere in the area:
a. Use flexible connections only on moving equipment and under the constraint that the length shall be less than 1.5 times maximum travel of the equipment.

C. Cable and conductor termination:

1. Terminate cables and conductors on terminal blocks.

2. Terminal block enclosures:
a. Suitable for the area classification as specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

D. Surge protection:

1. Provide outdoor field instrument loops with voltage surge protection units installed on the instruments and the panel.

2. Individually fuse each 4 to 20 mA DC loop with a 1/2-amp fuse between power supplies and receiver surge protectors.

3. Provide voltage surge protection for 4 wire transmitters and analyzers:
a. Protect both power source and signal loop.

3.02 RE-INSTALLATION
A. Existing instrumentation:

1. Clean, recondition and re-calibrate each existing instrument to be reused, removed, or reinstalled using an authorized service facility of the instrument manufacturer.

2. Provide certification of this Work before reinstallation of each instrument.

3.03 COMMISSIONING
A. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning and Section 17950 - Commissioning for Instrumentation and Controls.

3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Control valves:

1. Stroke control valves, cylinders, drives and connecting linkages from the control system as well as local control devices and adjust to verify proper control action, hand switch action, limit switch settings, torque settings, remote control actions, and remote feedback of valve status and position.

2. Check control valve actions and positioner settings with the valves in place to ensure that no changes have occurred since the bench calibration.

B. Make revisions necessary to the control system software, as directed by the Engineer.

1. It is understood that the Contractor knows and agrees that changes will be required in the control system software during commissioning.

Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems 17050-16 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17050 (DraftFinal)

3.05 CLEANING
A. Vacuum clean control panels and enclosures before process start-up and again after final completion of the project.

B. Clean panel surfaces.

C. Return to new condition any scratches and/or defects.

D. Wipe instrument faces and enclosures clean.

E. Leave wiring in panels, manholes, boxes, and other locations in a neat, clean, and organized manner:

1. Neatly coil and label spare wiring lengths.

2. Shorten, re-terminate, and re-label excessive spare wire and cable lengths, as determined by the Engineer.

END OF SECTION
Control Strategies
17100-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17100 (DraftFinal) SECTION 17100

CONTROL STRATEGIES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. PLC programming and SCADA configuration/programming for Campus Oaks and Misty Wood well sites will be performed by Carollo Engineers Inc. Programming Services. Carollo Programming Services will acquire the PLC program for the Roseville Solaire Well site and duplicate/modify the program to work for Campus Oaks and Misty Wood well sites. Carollo Programming Services already knows the City’s PLC and SCADA programming standards; because of this Part 3.02 – Programming Requirements is not used.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the configuration files and logic files.

1. Full annotation and descriptions for all PLCs files involved in the project, both new and modified.

2. Highlight each aspect of the logic that complies with the End User’s specifications or the Engineer’s specification.

3. Denote in the logic that does not comply with the End User’s or the Engineer’s specification.

4. The Engineer’s specifications can be located in this Section and Section 17101A - Specific Control Strategies - [Process Area].

5. Logic files shall be submitted in an organized manner with searchable text and book marked.

6. Logic files and configuration files shall be submitted together with the submittal requirement in Section 17101A - Specific Control Strategies - [Process Area].

7. Submittals shall comply with additional submittal requirements specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

Control Strategies
17100-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17100 (DraftFinal)

3.02 PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED)

3.03 COMMISSIONING
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems and 01756 - Commissioning.

END OF SECTION
Specific Control Strategies - [Process Area]
17101A-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17101A (DraftFinal) SECTION 17101A
SPECIFIC CONTROL STRATEGIES - [PROCESS AREA]
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Loop descriptions:

2. Specific control requirements and functional descriptions for individual control loops.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Abbreviations:

1. [None.]
B. Definitions:

1. Loop description: Specific control requirements and functional descriptions for individual control loops.

2. [None.]
C. Setpoints:

1. [See P&IDs, Instrument Datasheets, and I/O List.]

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Develop an overall control strategy for the project.

B. Develop detail loop descriptions based on loop number and title to adhere to the following:

1. References:
a. List P&IDs that are specifically referenced.

2. Abstract:
a. General description of how the loop works, what devices are involved, and how the process will be controlled.
b. For each control loop, provide a detailed functional description of the operation of the equipment, signals, and controls shown on the P&IDs. c. Include all functions depicted or described in the Contract Documents.

Specific Control Strategies - [Process Area]
17101A-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17101A (DraftFinal) d. Include the following within each loop description:
1) All requirements specific to that loop.
2) Submit loop descriptions with all implemented modifications from this Section clearly marked.
3) Remove all markings on final loop.
4) Common control requirements applicable to that loop. e. Include within the Control Description content:
1) Specific requirements.
2) Common requirements that pertain in general to all loops. 3) Listing ranges, setpoints, timers, values, counter values, etc. 4) Manual keyboard entries.
5) Entry codes.
6) System responses.
7) Modes:
a) Startup.
b) Routine and normal operation.
c) Regulation and control.
d) Shutdown under specified modes of operation.
e) Emergency operating shutdown.
f. Process values, setpoints, and limits, including units and ranges:
1) Show span and range values for analog inputs and outputs, and operating point and deadband for discrete inputs.

3. Hardwired control:
a. Detailed description of the control functions at the local level. b. Function of local operator interfaces.
c. Operation of hardwired field pilot controls:
1) Pushbuttons.
2) Selector switches.
3) Potentiometers.
4) Pilot lights, indicators, and other displays.

4. Hardwired interlocks:
a. Explanation of the operation of system interlocks and hardwired permissive conditions.

5. PLC control:
a. Detailed description of the control functions that are under control of the PLC.
b. Operator controls and automatic controls.
c. Setpoints, alarms, etc.:
1) Include units and ranges for analog values.
2) Include span and range for analog inputs and outputs. 3) Include operating point and deadband for discrete inputs, and identify conditions where contacts are open, and when they close. d. Control sequences.
e. Software interlocks:
1) Operation of system software interlocks.

6. PCS/LOI/HMI control:
a. Detailed description of the operator controls.
b. Setpoints, alarms, etc.

7. Indicators and alarms:
a. List any indicators and alarms specific to the loop that are not covered in the common control strategies.

Specific Control Strategies - [Process Area]
17101A-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17101A (DraftFinal)

8. Failure modes:
a. List any failure modes specific to the loop that are not covered in the common control strategies.

C. Where there are similar loops with identical control, such as multiple loops for individual raw water pumps, only 1 loop description need be developed and the remaining loops may reference that loop description.

1.06 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 ASR WELL CONTROL
A. Aquifer Recharge Operation (AR in AS/AR):

1. References:
a. P&ID 13N01.
b. P&ID 19N01.
c. P&ID 13N02.
d. P&ID 19N02.
e. P&ID 13N03.
f. P&ID 19N03.

2. Abstract:
a. Aquifer Recharge (AR) operating mode consists of directing the flow of water into the well or recharging the well using water from the Roseville distribution system for storage in the aquifer. The operational sequence is done in stages. First is to vent all air in the above ground piping. This is done by first having all valves (20, 30, 40, 50, 60) closed, including the Baski DHCV (11). Then open WD34-MOVX-30150/ WD34-MOVX-36150.

Second is purge all air in the column pipe. This will be done by opening WD34-MOVX-30130/WD34-MOVX-36130 which will allow the flow of water to prime the column pipe. All venting will happen with the AVRV valves located at the above ground piping sections. Once all air is purged out the above ground piping and column pipe the modulating BASKI Down Hole Control Valve (DHCV) will regulate the recharge flow rate via control of nitrogen which actuates the BASKI valve. Purging of the air to atmosphere is to mitigate the well being clogged with entrapped air in the water.
b. The recharge mode is used to store excess water from the Roseville system for later use. The rate of recharge flow shall be measured by the main piping discharge magmeter along with the trickle flow magmeter, and integrated over time by the PLC to determine the volume during the recharge period. (The main piping magmeter is located in a drop-loop section of piping in order to keep the unit full of water during periods when the piping may otherwise drain down when not in the recharge mode. If Specific Control Strategies - [Process Area]
17101A-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17101A (DraftFinal) allowed to drain there would be a lag in reliable flow information from the magmeter during start-up operation. The trickle flow magmeter is located near the wellhead.) The instantaneous flowrate and totalized quantity recharged shall be added to the total quantity stored information which will be displayed on the local OIT and transmitted from the PLC to the centralized historian system via the SCADA interface. Below are the steps for PLC programming to complete a Recharge cycle: (all set-points, unless noted, are specified in the set-points screen).
c. During Recharge the system uses two (2) flow control valves in series to control the flow of water.
1) The purpose of the downhole Baski control valve (Inflate) is to create enough backpressure to keep the ASR pump vertical column pipe full so as to prevent cascading and possible air entrainment during recharge. The pump assembly below the downhole control valve has its own check valve (below the bowl assembly) that will prevent flow backwards through the pump.
2) The rate of recharge flow will be mainly controlled by modulating the pressure (inflation / deflation of nitrogen) on the downhole control valve (BASKI valve). A secondary option, should the BASKI valve have issues, would be to modulate the flow rate using the Recharge Flow Control Valve (WD34-MOVX-30130/WD34-MOVX-36130)
located on the surface piping downstream of the pressure reducing valve on the incoming recharge pipe from the system.
3) If desired recharge rates are not met with the DHCV valve fully open and if the annular water column is brought above surface at a minimum of 2 psi, the installed Annular Recharge Valve
WD34-MOVX-30120/WD34-MOVX-36120 may be used to provide
additional flow capacity down well. Additionally the annular recharge valve is the third valve that will provide additional means for recharge in the well. This valve is only opened after recharge is taking place through the down hole control valve, the well annular pressure is above 2 psi (this allows for the water in the annular column space to be brought to ~4.5 feet above land surface and purging of air through the ARV attached to the annular piping), and if the desired set flow rate is not yet achieved. This valve is a fully open or closed valve. As a result, if opening the valve does create excess capacity than the set flow rate, then the DHCV shall still be modulated to decrease flow down the pump column to bring the system to the set flow rate. 4) Recharge Mode should be initiated either by:
a) An operator manually engaging the recharge mode.
b) An inputted date time start/stop and/or set total volume of recharge amount.

3. Hardwired control:
a. The following valves required for Recharge have LOCAL-STOP-REMOTE mode, when placed in LOCAL mode each valve can be either fully opened, fully closed or somewhere in between:
1) WD34-FCVX-30150, Recharge Flow Control Valve.
2) WD34-MOVX-30130, Pump Column Recharge Valve.
3) WD34-MOVX-30120, Well Annulus Recharge Valve.
4) WD34-MOVX-30140, Waste Valve.
5) WD34-MOVX-30160, Aquifer Recovery to Production Valve.

Specific Control Strategies - [Process Area]
17101A-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17101A (DraftFinal) 6) WD34-FCVX-36150, Recharge Flow Control Valve.
7) WD34-MOVX-36130, Pump Column Recharge Valve.
8) WD34-MOVX-36120, Well Annulus Recharge Valve.
9) WD34-MOVX-36140, Waste Valve.
10) WD34-MOVX-36160, Aquifer Recovery to Production Valve.

4. Hardwired interlocks/Overload Programmed Interlocks:
a. None.

5. PLC Control:
a. Step 1 – Initiate.
1) The operator selects the Recharge button on the local OIT. b. Step 2 – Maintenance Check.
1) The ASR system will automatically go to maintenance mode where all valves are to be closed (except the trickle flow).
c. Step 3 – Preliminary Flow.
1) The WD34-MOVX-30150 / WD34-MOVX 36150 flow control valve shall fully open. This allows water to enter the surface piping through the modulating flow control valve and to force any air in the above ground piping to vent through air release valves (during normal recharge operation where the DHCV controls recharge rates the flow control valve should be set to fully open). After a preset time-delay sufficient to vent the air from the piping (to be determined during startup) the next downstream recharge valve for pump column recharge can be opened; however, the downhole recharge valve shall remain closed.
d. Step 4 – Auto Control (Flow).
1) Once the air is purged from the above ground piping the Pump Column Recharge Valve will open to allow recharge flow to begin down the pump column. As the pump column fills the air is vented out through the air release valve on the pump discharge pipe. The flow will stabilize to 0 gpm once all the air is vented. A time step (which will be determined during start up of each well) will need to be entered as a minimum set time prior to proceeding to the next recharge step.
2) The downhole flow control valve (Baski valve) located in the pump column above the bowl assembly will open and modulate to the pre-set recharge desired flow rate which will begin recharge through the well annular space. The Baski valve opens and closes based off of low and high pressure limits of the nitrogen pressure lines attached from the above ground tanks and controls. The low pressure (fully open) and high pressure (fully close) are determined during startup but can range from 100 psi to 250 psi respectively.

The programing shall regulate the nitrogen pressure to meet the set recharge desired flow rate. Pressure ranges of operation for valve settings in closed, partially opened and fully opened positions shall be established during start-up and then entered in the programing function for automatic operation. (Note the ASR pump is OFF and the non-reverse ratchet is in place to prevent any backspin. There is also a check valve on the suction of the bowl assembly to prevent reverse flow through the bowls.) As the recharge continues down the pump column and the recharge water enters the well through the downhole Specific Control Strategies - [Process Area]
17101A-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17101A (DraftFinal) control valve, the water level in the well casing annulus will rise based off the Specific Injectivity (Si) of the aquifer. 3) If the annular pressure is greater than 2 psi and if the targeted recharge rate is not achieved with the DHCV (Baski) valve fully open, then the PLC starts a pre-set time delay to account for fluctuations in the level transducer. When the timer is done, the control sequence will continue to step 6, skipping step 5.

6. Step 5 – Auto Control (Pressure).
1) The downhole control valve is switched to auto control based on pressure. Pressure on the Baski valve shall modulate to set recharge flow rate. The PLC shall be connected to two valves on the Baski operation panel. One valve controls the pressurization of the DHCV by opening and supplying nitrogen down hole, the other opens an above ground vent line that will depressurize the DHCV. A deadband range shall be established during startup so that there’s no excess ventilation of nitrogen gas as it is a finite source.
b. Step 6 – Opening Annulus Recharge Valve (FCVX-30120 / -36120). 1) The annulus recharge valve opens when is safe to recharge. Air entrapment is the main issue that is needed to be mitigated for annular recharge. As the water level in the well casing rises air will be released through the air and vacuum release valve on the annular recharge piping. Once the well annular pressure reaches 2 psi the water should be at ~6 feet above surface. This is above the proposed annular recharge valve WD34-MOVX-30120 (and -36120). A time step delay should be set (to be determined during startup) to verify pressure does not dip below the target 2 psi prior to opening the annular recharge valve (when the well level set-point is met). After the valve is opened, the sequence will continue to step 7. c. Step 7 – Recharge into the well/Done.
1) This is the last step of recharge. In this step, the PLC will maintain a steady flow based on a flow rate set-point using the downhole control valve. Water flows down the pump column, and if needed to achieve the flowrate set-point, down the annular column allowing greater flows. The annular valve shall not be shut off unless the target recharge volume is exceeded and the down hole control valve is completely closed. In that case the PLC shall open up the down hole control valve to fully open and close the annular recharge valve. A 15 minute time delay will start (may be adjusted during start up) prior returning to step 6 (this is done to manage looping between steps 6 and 7 continuously given the set flow rate may exceed the rate allowed down pump column but may exceed with annular recharge and pump column closed).
2) The following actions will take the system out of recharge mode:
a) Operator putting the system in Maintenance mode.
b) As set by the inputted schedule described in 3.01.A.2.c.4(b). c) The PLC is constantly monitoring the well empty level. If it gets below the level set-point, a 20 second time delay will start. After the timer finishes, it will close the well annulus recharge valve and return to step 5 to control the flow based on pressure to wait for optimal conditions where the annular valve can be opened again.

Specific Control Strategies - [Process Area]
17101A-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17101A (DraftFinal)

7. Indicators and alarms:
a. As mentioned in A.5 and as indicated on the Drawings.

8. Failure modes:
a. As mentioned in A.5 and as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Waste Only (Backflush) Operation:

1. References:
a. P&ID 13N01.
b. P&ID 19N01.
c. P&ID 13N02.
d. P&ID 19N02.
e. P&ID 13N03.
f. P&ID 19N03.

2. Abstract:
a. The Waste Only (or Flushing or Backflushing) operating mode consists of flushing water out of the aquifer through the well screen, pump column, and aboveground piping to the proposed air gap structure. This typically is done prior to recovery or, when specific capacity (or specific injectivity) of the well decreases 70 percent - 80 percent or after prolonged inactivity during storage season. The flushing rate of the well should be greater than the recovery rate of the well and typically would last up to an hour but the time duration, frequency and flow rates will be determined during the well development period one to two years after startup. The rate of flow will be measured by magmeter, and integrated over time by the PLC to determine the volume during the flushing period. The instantaneous flowrate and totalized flush quantity shall be deducted from the stored quantity information will be displayed on the local OIT and transmitted from the PLC to the centralized historian system via the SCADA interface.

Below in C.5 are the steps the PLC is programmed to do to complete a Flushing cycle.

3. Hardwired control:
a. The following valves required for Recharge have LOCAL-STOP-REMOTE mode, when placed in LOCAL mode each valve can be either fully opened, fully closed or somewhere in between:
1) WD34-FCVX-30150, Recharge Flow Control Valve.
2) WD34-MOVX-30130, Pump Column Recharge Valve.
3) WD34-MOVX-30120, Well Annulus Recharge Valve.
4) WD34-MOVX-30140, Waste Valve.
5) WD34-MOVX-30160, Aquifer Recovery to Production Valve. 6) WD34-FCVX-36150, Recharge Flow Control Valve.
7) WD34-MOVX-36130, Pump Column Recharge Valve.
8) WD34-MOVX-36120, Well Annulus Recharge Valve.
9) WD34-MOVX-36140, Waste Valve.
10) WD34-MOVX-36160, Aquifer Recovery to Production Valve. 11) Downhole Control Valve.
b. In LOCAL mode, VFD can be operated via the VFD HMI.

4. Hardwired interlocks/Overload Programmed Interlocks:
a. Well Pump discharge HiHi Pressure Switch.
b. Well Pump seal Water Lo Flow Switch.
c. Well Pump motors HiHi Temperature.
d. Well Pump VFD Fault.

Specific Control Strategies - [Process Area]
17101A-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17101A (DraftFinal)

5. PLC Control:
a. Step 1 – Initiate.
1) The operator inputs the Flushing rate and time for flushing on the OIT (the interface shall have the max flowrate from any prior Recovery cycle along with the max flow rate from the last set of recovery cycle(s) back to the prior Flushing Operation. Note there is a minimum flow rate required for the pump to bring the water column to surface, through the aboveground piping and to the discharge structure. This minimum flow rate shall be listed on the HMI. If operator selects flow rate less than minimum and ERROR message shall be shown on the HMI and the programing shall not progress to Step 2. The minimum flow rate shall be established during start-up). 2) The operator hits the Flushing button on the local OIT. b. Step 2 – Maintenance Check.
1) If the ASR system is coming from recharge mode or recovery mode, the sequence will continue to step 4. If the ASR system is in any other mode, it will automatically go to maintenance mode to close every valve. If all valves are closed, the sequence will continue to step 3.
c. Step 3 – Priming Column and Above Ground Piping.
1) The Recharge flow control valve shall open to prime the above ground piping.
2) Once open the Pump Column Recharge Valve shall be opened. 3) A specified time delay shall be initiated to allow for pre-lubrication of the pump shaft (the time delay is to be determined during start-up).

After the time delay is completed, it will continue to step 4. a) Additionally the well is configured with pre-lube and is connected into the pump and controlled via a solenoid and can be
programmed as a secondary option for lubrication of the line shaft. This should be programmed into the PLC and set with an initial timer of < 1 minute and adjusted during start-up. d. Step 4 – Open the Aquifer Flush Valve.
1) The aquifer flush valve is commanded to open to start flowing water from the well to well to waste airgap structure. When the valve gives confirmation of being opened, the sequence will continue to step 5. e. Step 5 – Auto Control (Flow).
1) The pump is turned on and set to control the flow of water based on the operator-specified flow set-point. After the pump starts running, it will continue to step 6.
f. Step 6 – Auto Flush/Done.
1) The flushing mode continues to flush for a user adjustable amount of time. The HMI shall show the countdown timer on the screen. When the timer is done, it will take the system into Maintenance mode to close and stop everything.

6. Indicators and alarms:
a. As indicated on the Drawings and specified in Section 17100 - Control Strategies.

7. Failure modes:
a. As indicated on the Drawings and specified in Section 17100 - Control Strategies.

Specific Control Strategies - [Process Area]
17101A-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17101A (DraftFinal) C. Recovery Operation – Flow Control Mode:

1. References:
a. P&ID 13N01.
b. P&ID 19N01.
c. P&ID 13N02.
d. P&ID 19N02.
e. P&ID 13N03.
f. P&ID 19N03.
g. P&ID 13N04.
h. P&ID 19N04.
i. P&ID 13N05.
j. P&ID 19N05.
k. P&ID 13N06.
l. P&ID 19N06.

2. Abstract:
a. Recovery operating mode consists on pumping water out of the aquifer to the Roseville distribution system. As the water flows out of the ASR well is disinfected with NaOCl and fluorinated with NaF as the water is being returned to the distribution system. The instantaneous flowrate and totalized quantity recovered shall be deducted to the total quantity stored information which will be displayed on the local OIT and transmitted from the PLC to the centralized historian system via the SCADA interface.

Below in D.5 are the steps the PLC is programmed to do to complete a Recovery cycle.
b. There shall be two initiation modes for the Recovery Operation:
1) Recovery based off of distribution system’s zonal pressure – This option allows the operator to set a minimum system pressure to start up the well. The intent of this mode is to automate the starting and stopping of the well as the distribution system’s zonal pressure set point. A programmed delayed response shall be included and set during start-up to prevent the pump pre-maturely starting and/or stopping due to pressure fluctuations in zonal system pressure with small differential time steps.
2) Recovery based off of operator assigned flow rate – This option allows the operator to initiate the recovery flow rate by inputting a desired flow rate of recovery (so long as it’s greater than the minimum flow rate as established during start-up).

3. Hardwired control:
a. The following valves required for Recharge have LOCAL-STOP-REMOTE mode, when placed in LOCAL mode each valve can be either fully opened, fully closed or somewhere in between:
1) WD34-FCVX-30150, Recharge Flow Control Valve.
2) WD34-MOVX-30130, Pump Column Recharge Valve.
3) WD34-MOVX-30120, Well Annulus Recharge Valve.
4) WD34-MOVX-30140, Waste Valve.
5) WD34-MOVX-30160, Aquifer Recovery to Production Valve. 6) WD34-FCVX-36150, Recharge Flow Control Valve.
7) WD34-MOVX-36130, Pump Column Recharge Valve.
8) WD34-MOVX-36120, Well Annulus Recharge Valve.
9) WD34-MOVX-36140, Waste Valve.
10) WD34-MOVX-30160, Aquifer Recovery to Production Valve.

Specific Control Strategies - [Process Area]
17101A-10 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17101A (DraftFinal) 11) Down Hole Control Valve.
b. In LOCAL mode, VFD can be operated via the VFD HMI.

4. Hardwired interlocks/Overload Programmed Interlocks:
a. Well Pump discharge HiHi Pressure Switch.
b. Well Pump seal Water Lo Flow Switch.
c. Well Pump motors HiHi Temperature Switch.
d. Well Pump VFD Fault.

5. PLC Control:
a. Step 1 – Initiate.
1) The operator sets the desired Recovery flow rate on the local OIT. 2) The operator sets the desired Backflush flow rate and time on the OIT.
3) The operator selects the Recovery Mode on the local OIT. The HMI will record the date and time when this mode is initiated. b. Step 2 – Maintenance Check.
1) If the ASR system is coming from recharge or backflush mode, the sequence will continue to step 4. If the ASR system is in any other mode, it will automatically go to maintenance mode to close every valve. If all valves are closed, the sequence will continue to step 3. c. Step 3 – Priming Column and Above Ground Piping.
1) The Recharge flow control valve shall open to prime the above ground piping.
2) Once open the Pump Column Recharge Valve shall be opened. 3) A X minute time delay shall be initiated to allow for pre-lubrication of the pump shaft. After time delay is completed, it will continue to step 4.
d. Step 4 – Backflush Check.
1) If a flow rate and time frame is entered in the Backflush flow OIT and it meets the minimum flow rate then the aquifer flush valve is commanded to open to start flowing water from the well to well to waste airgap structure. When the valve gives confirmation of being opened, the sequence will continue to step 5.
2) If a flow rate and time frame = 0 then the sequence will continue to step 7.
e. Step 5 – Auto Control (Backflush Flow).
1) The pump is turned on and set to control the flow of water based on the operator inputted waste flow set-point. After the pump starts running, it will continue to step 6.
f. Step 6 – Auto Flush / Done.
1) The flushing mode continues to flush for a user adjustable amount of time. The HMI shall show the countdown timer on the screen. When the timer is done, it will continue to step 7.
g. Step 7 – Aquifer Recovery to Production Valve OPEN.
1) The Aquifer Recovery to Production Valve is commanded to open to start flowing water to the distribution system. When the valve gives confirmation of being opened, the sequence shall continue to step 8. h. Step 8 – Recovery Flow.
1) A check shall initiate to confirm that the pump is ON. If pump is ON proceed to Step 8.2, if pump is OFF turn pump on and set to control the flow of water based on the operator entered production flow Specific Control Strategies - [Process Area]
17101A-11 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17101A (DraftFinal) set-point. After the pump starts running, the sequence will continue to step 9.
2) The ASR Well will adjust to the entered flow setpoint for recovery.

When done the Waste Valve will be set to CLOSE. Once the valve is CLOSED the sequence will continue to step 9.
i. Step 9 – Flowing to Distribution/Done.
1) The ASR Well Pump is set to control the flow of water based on a flow set-point. The system will remain in this step, flowing water at a specific set-point until maintenance mode is initiated by the operator at the OIT.

6. Indicators and alarms:
a. As indicated on the Drawings and specified in Section 17100 - Control Strategies.

7. Failure modes:
a. As indicated on the Drawings and specified in Section 17100 - Control Strategies.

D. Recovery Operation – Pressure Control Mode:

1. References:
a. P&ID 13N01.
b. P&ID 19N01.
c. P&ID 13N02.
d. P&ID 19N02.
e. P&ID 13N03.
f. P&ID 19N03.
g. P&ID 13N04.
h. P&ID 19N04.
i. P&ID 13N05.
j. P&ID 19N05.
k. P&ID 13N06.
l. P&ID 19N06.

2. Abstract:
a. Recovery – Pressure control operating mode consists of having an option to turn ON or turn OFF an automated process to initiate the Recovery mode based on system pressure. Like the Recovery mode this mode initiates pumping water out of the aquifer to the Roseville distribution system. As the water flows out of the ASR well is disinfected with NaOCl and fluorinated with NaF as the water is being returned to the distribution system.

This mode will become active if the mode is set to “ON”. Active means this mode wont necessarily start but will start if the following parameters are met: If the system pressure drops below the operator entered minimum system pressure valve the Pressure Control Mode Operation will begin.

Likely the system will turn to OFF if the system pressure exceeds the operator entered maximum system pressure value in the OIT (for both start up and shut down there shall be a time interval programmed to eliminate the small description in pressure changes).

The instantaneous flowrate and totalized quantity recovered shall be deducted to the total quantity stored information which will be displayed Specific Control Strategies - [Process Area]
17101A-12 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17101A (DraftFinal) on the local OIT and transmitted from the PLC to the centralized historian system via the SCADA interface.

Below in E.5 are the steps the PLC is programmed to do to complete a Recovery cycle.

3. Hardwired control:
a. The following valves required for Recharge have LOCAL-STOP-REMOTE mode, when placed in LOCAL mode each valve can be either fully opened, fully closed or somewhere in between:
1) WD34-FCVX-30150, Recharge Flow Control Valve.
2) WD34-MOVX-30130, Pump Column Recharge Valve.
3) WD34-MOVX-30120, Well Annulus Recharge Valve.
4) WD34-MOVX-30140, Waste Valve.
5) WD34-MOVX-30160, Aquifer Recovery to Production Valve. 6) WD34-FCVX-36150, Recharge Flow Control Valve.
7) WD34-MOVX-36130, Pump Column Recharge Valve.
8) WD34-MOVX-36120, Well Annulus Recharge Valve.
9) WD34-MOVX-36140, Waste Valve.
10) WD34-MOVX-30160, Aquifer Recovery to Production Valve. 11) Down Hole Control Valve.
b. In LOCAL mode, VFD can be operated via the VFD HMI.

4. Hardwired interlocks/Overload Programmed Interlocks:
a. Well Pump discharge HiHi Pressure Switch.
b. Well Pump seal Water Lo Flow Switch.
c. Well Pump motors HiHi Temperature Switch.
d. Well Pump VFD Fault.

5. PLC Control:
a. Step 1 – Initiate.
1) The operator sets “Minimum System Pressure to turn pump ON” to a X (psi) value on the local OIT.
2) The operator sets “Maximum System Pressure to turn pump OFF” to a X (psi) value on the local OIT.
3) The operator sets “Desired System Pressure” to indirectly set target pump recovery speed.
4) The operator sets the desired Backflush flow rate and time on the OIT.
5) This setting will still allow for other modes of operation to still happen.

It will however override any other system operation if the system pressure falls outside these parameters. If the system falls outside these parameters the HMI will record the date and time when this mode is initiated and it will proceed to step 2
b. Step 2 – Maintenance Check.
1) If the ASR system is coming from recharge or backflush mode, the sequence will continue to step 4. If the ASR system is in any other mode, it will automatically go to maintenance mode to close every valve. If all valves are closed, the sequence will continue to step 3. c. Step 3 – Priming Column and Above Ground Piping.
1) The Recharge flow control valve shall open to prime the above ground piping.
2) Once open the Pump Column Recharge Valve shall be opened.

Specific Control Strategies - [Process Area]
17101A-13 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17101A (DraftFinal) 3) A X minute time delay shall be initiated to allow for pre-lubrication of the pump shaft. After time delay is completed, it will continue to Step 4.
d. Step 4 – Backflush Check.
1) If a flow rate and time frame is entered in the Backflush flow OIT and it meets the minimum flow rate then the aquifer flush valve is commanded to open to start flowing water from the well to well to waste airgap structure. When the valve gives confirmation of being opened, the sequence will continue to step 5.
2) If a flow rate and time frame = 0 then the sequence will continue to step 7.
e. Step 5 – Auto Control (Backflush Flow).
1) The pump is turned on and set to control the flow of water based on the operator inputted waste flow set-point. After the pump starts running, it will continue to step 6.
f. Step 6 – Auto Flush / Done.
1) The flushing mode continues to flush for a user inputted amount of time. The HMI shall show the countdown timer on the screen. When the timer is done, it will continue to step 7.
g. Step 7 – Aquifer Recovery to Production Valve OPEN.
1) The Aquifer Recovery to Production Valve is commanded to open to start flowing water to the distribution system. When the valve gives confirmation of being opened, the sequence shall continue to step 8. h. Step 8 – Recovery Flow.
1) A check shall initiate to confirm that the pump is ON. If pump is ON proceed to step 8.2, if pump is OFF turn pump on and set to control the flow of water based on the operator entered production flow set-point. After the pump starts running, the sequence will continue to step 9.
2) The ASR Well will adjust to the entered flow setpoint for recovery.

When done the Waste Valve will be set to CLOSE. Once the valve is CLOSED the sequence will continue to step 9.
i. Step 9 – Flowing to Distribution / Done.
1) The ASR Well Pump is set to control the flow of water based on desired system pressure. The system will remain in this step, flowing water at a specific set-point until maintenance mode is initiated by the operator at the OIT or the Maximum system pressure set point is reached. Once reached consistently for X minutes system shall go into maintenance mode.

6. Indicators and alarms:
a. As indicated on the Drawings and specified in Section 17100 - Control Strategies.

7. Failure modes:
a. As indicated on the Drawings and specified in Section 17100 - Control Strategies.

E. Maintenance Operation:

1. References:
a. P&ID 13N01.
b. P&ID 19N01.
c. P&ID 13N02.

Specific Control Strategies - [Process Area]
17101A-14 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17101A (DraftFinal) d. P&ID 19N02.
e. P&ID 13N03.
f. P&ID 19N03.
g. P&ID 13N04.
h. P&ID 19N04.
i. P&ID 13N05.
j. P&ID 19N05.
k. P&ID 13N06.
l. P&ID 19N06.

2. Abstract:
a. Maintenance mode consists of closing all valves and stopping all pumps.

This mode puts the system in “stand-by” mode. The operator should take the system into Maintenance mode after finishing with every other mode.

Below in F.5 are the steps the PLC is programmed to complete a Maintenance cycle.

3. Hardwired control:
a. The following valves required for Recharge have LOCAL-STOP-REMOTE mode, when placed in LOCAL mode each valve can be either fully opened, fully closed or somewhere in between.
1) WD34-FCVX-30150, Recharge Flow Control Valve.
2) WD34-MOVX-30130, Pump Column Recharge Valve.
3) WD34-MOVX-30120, Well Annulus Recharge Valve.
4) WD34-MOVX-30140, Waste Valve.
5) WD34-MOVX-30160, Aquifer Recovery to Production Valve. 6) WD34-FCVX-36150, Recharge Flow Control Valve.
7) WD34-MOVX-36130, Pump Column Recharge Valve.
8) WD34-MOVX-36120, Well Annulus Recharge Valve.
9) WD34-MOVX-36140, Waste Valve.
10) WD34-MOVX-30160, Aquifer Recovery to Production Valve. 11) Down Hole Control Valve.
b. In LOCAL mode, VFD can be operated via the VFD HMI.

4. Hardwired interlocks/Overload Programmed Interlocks:
a. None.

5. PLC Control:
a. Step 1 – Initiate.
1) The operator hits the Maintenance button on the local OIT. b. Step 2 – Pump OFF.
1) This step makes sure the pump/VFD is set to OFF and ZERO speed.

This step also resets internal PLC bits and internal modes. When the VFD gives confirmation of not running, the sequence will continue to step 3.
c. Step 3 – Chemicals OFF.
1) This step makes sure the chemical pumps are set to OFF and ZERO speed. When the pumps give confirmation of not running, the sequence will continue to step 4.
d. Step 4 – Trickle Flow ON.
1) This step makes sure the trickle flow solenoid is CLOSED. There’s no confirmation in this step, so the sequence continues to step 5 immediately.

Specific Control Strategies - [Process Area]
17101A-15 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17101A (DraftFinal) e. Step 5 – Down Hole Control Valve CLOSED.
1) This step confirms that the down hole control valve is fully CLOSED with position set to XXX psi as determined during start-up. When the valve pressure transducer gives confirmation of set point, the sequence will continue to step 6.
f. Step 6 – Recharge Valve CLOSED.
1) This step makes sure the flow control valve is set to OFF and ZERO percent opening. When the valve gives confirmation of closed, the sequence will continue to step 7.
g. Step 7 – Aquifer Flush Valve CLOSED.
1) This step makes sure the Aquifer Flush valve is set to CLOSED.

When the valve gives confirmation of closed, the sequence will continue to step 8.
h. Step 8 – Recovery Valve CLOSED.
1) This step makes sure the Recovery valve is set to CLOSED. When the valve gives confirmation of closed, the sequence will continue to step 9.
i. Step 9 – Well Annulus Recharge Valve CLOSED.
1) This step makes sure the Well Annulus Recharge valve is set to CLOSED. When the valve gives confirmation of closed, the sequence will continue to step 10.
j. Step 10 – Done.
1) The system stays in this step until an operator input.

6. Indicators and alarms:
a. As indicated on the Drawings and specified in Section 17100 - Control Strategies.

7. Failure modes:
a. As indicated on the Drawings and specified in Section 17100 - Control Strategies.

F. Sodium Hypochlorite Feed System:

1. References:
a. P&ID 13N02.
b. P&ID 19N02.
c. P&ID 13N04.
d. P&ID 19N04.

2. Abstract:
a. During Recovery operations the chlorine residual will be restored for the recovered water via feeding a liquid Sodium Hypochlorite solution. The feed pump rate per stroke shall be operator adjustable. Below in G.5 are the steps the PLC is programmed to control the chemical feed system.

3. Hardwired control:
a. TBD.

4. Hardwired interlocks/Overload Programmed Interlocks:
a. TBD.

5. PLC Control:
a. Step 1 – Initiate.
1) The selected active feed pump will start when the Recovery mode is selected.

Specific Control Strategies - [Process Area]
17101A-16 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17101A (DraftFinal) b. Step 2 – Flow Pacing with Closed Loop and Analyzer Trim, reference Section 17100 - Control Strategies.
1) The feed rate shall be paced with the recovery flowrate to achieve the desired disinfection level.
c. Step 3 – Done.
1) Once the Recovery mode is deselected the operation of the selected feed pump shall stop.

6. Indicators and alarms:
a. As indicated on the Drawings and specified in Section 17100 - Control Strategies.

7. Failure modes:
a. As indicated on the Drawings and specified in Section 17100 - Control Strategies.

G. Sodium Fluoride Feed System:

1. References:
a. P&ID 13N02.
b. P&ID 19N02.
c. P&ID 13N05.
d. P&ID 19N05.
e. P&ID 013N06.
f. P&ID 19N06.

2. Abstract:
a. During Recovery operations, if necessary, the fluoride residual will be restored for the recovered water via feeding liquid Sodium Fluoride solution. The feed pump rate per stroke shall be operator adjustable. b. Below in H.5 are the steps the PLC is programmed to control the chemical feed system.

3. Hardwired control:
a. TBD.

4. Hardwired interlocks/Overload Programmed Interlocks:
a. TBD.

5. PLC Control:
a. Step 1 – Initiate.
1) The selected active feed pump will start when the Recovery mode is selected.
b. Step 2 – Flow Pacing with Closed loop and Analyzer Trim, reference Section 17100 - Control Strategies.
1) The feed rate shall be paced with the recovery flowrate to achieve the desired disinfection level.
c. Step 3 – Done.
1) Once the Recovery mode is deselected the operation of the selected feed pump shall stop.

6. Indicators and alarms:
a. As indicated on the Drawings and specified in Section 17100 - Control Strategies.

7. Failure modes:
a. As indicated on the Drawings and specified in Section 17100 - Control Strategies.

Specific Control Strategies - [Process Area]
17101A-17 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17101A (DraftFinal) H. Nested Monitoring Well (containing Zone B, and C):

1. References:
a. P&ID 13N06.
b. P&ID 19N06.

2. Abstract:
a. Water from Zone B and C of the monitoring well will be individually sampled as needed. A sump pump will deliver each sample of the monitoring well water to the ASR building.

3. Hardwired control:
a. In LOCAL mode, VFD can be operated via the VFD HMI.

4. Hardwired interlocks/Overload Programmed Interlocks:
a. Well Pump VFD Fault.

5. PLC Control:
a. Sampling will be done at the end of a timer interval or when initiated by the operator at the VFD or via the OIT.
b. When initiated either automatically or manually, the timer will reset when the pump is confirmed not running.
c. The automatic duty cycle of the sump pump is TBD.
d. The speed profile of the VFD is TBD.

6. Indicators and alarms:
a. As indicated on the Drawings and specified in Section 17100 - Control Strategies.

7. Failure modes:
a. As indicated on the Drawings and specified in Section 17100 - Control Strategies.

I. Nested Monitoring Well (containing Zone A):

1. References:
a. P&ID 13N06.
b. P&ID 19N06.

2. Abstract:

The water level in Zone A of the monitoring well will be continuously monitored.

3. Hardwired control:
a. None.

4. Hardwired interlocks/Overload Programmed Interlocks:
a. None.

5. PLC Control:
a. None.

6. Indicators and alarms:
a. As indicated on the Drawings and specified in Section 17100 - Control Strategies.

7. Failure modes:
a. As specified in Section 17100 - Control Strategies.

J. Filters (for future installation):

1. References:
a. N/A.

2. Abstract:
a. Filter System Overview: The filter system consists of several pressure filters used to remove iron and manganese from the well water before Specific Control Strategies - [Process Area]
17101A-18 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17101A (DraftFinal) sending the water to the distribution system. This system will be programmed by the supplier of the equipment with a dedicated operator interface terminal (OIT). This section provides a general overview of the filter operation and the filter system submittal will provide the additional details. A master PLC at the site will both provide inputs to the OIT and received outputs from the OIT in an effort to coordinate overall processes on the site. Other systems that require coordination with the filter system include the Backwash Waste Tank, Well, and Sodium Hypochlorite chemical feed.
b. Filter Operations: Filters will be operated in one of several modes:
1) Filtration: Water is filtered and going to the system. Valves are positioned accordingly.
2) Backwash: Filter is washed and washwater is going to the backwash waste tank. Valves are positioned accordingly.
3) Maintenance: Filter is taken out-of-service (no water flow either direction) for inspection and/or repair. The filter cannot be automatically brought into an active state (Filtration or Backwash) until removed from Maintenance Mode.
4) Offline: Filter is taken-of-service and all valves are closed. The filter can automatically be brought into an active state.
c. Water Production to System: Flow meters on each filter train will measure individual flow rates per train and summed together to provide a total flowrate. Likewise a totalized volume for both individual trains and combined trains will be calculated by the Filter System PLC. During a backwash there may be flow backwards across the flow meter. This change in direction (negative value) will be accounted for in the calculations.
d. Backwash Flow: When a filter is washed a backwash flow meter and control valve will be used to adjust the wash rate. The flow rate will be measured and the totalized volume will be calculated.
e. Backwash Event: A filter can either be brought into a backwash mode automatically through setpoints or manually initiated by the treatment operator. Setpoints for automatic operation include filter run time, differential pressure across the filter train, and totalized volume treated since last backwash.

3. Hardwired control:
a. The following valves required for Recharge have LOCAL-STOP-REMOTE mode, when placed in LOCAL mode each valve can be either fully opened, fully closed or somewhere in between:
1) WD34-FCVX-30150, Recharge Flow Control Valve.
2) WD34-MOVX-30130, Pump Column Recharge Valve.
3) WD34-MOVX-30120, Well Annulus Recharge Valve.
4) WD34-MOVX-30140, Waste Valve.
5) WD34-MOVX-30160, Aquifer Recovery to Production Valve. 6) WD34-FCVX-36150, Recharge Flow Control Valve.
7) WD34-MOVX-36130, Pump Column Recharge Valve.
8) WD34-MOVX-36120, Well Annulus Recharge Valve.
9) WD34-MOVX-36140, Waste Valve.
10) WD34-MOVX-30160, Aquifer Recovery to Production Valve. 11) Down Hole Control Valve
b. In LOCAL mode, VFD can be operated via the VFD HMI.

Specific Control Strategies - [Process Area]
17101A-19 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17101A (DraftFinal)

4. Hardwired interlocks/Overload Programmed Interlocks:
a. Well Pump discharge HiHi Pressure Switch.
b. Well Pump seal Water Lo Flow Switch.
c. Well Pump motors HiHi Temperature Switch.
d. Well Pump VFD Fault.

5. PLC Control:
a. Step 1 – Initiate.
1) The operator selects the Recovery Mode on the local OIT. The HMI will record the date and time when this mode is initiated. b. Step 2 – Maintenance Check.
1) If the ASR system is coming from recharge mode, it will automatically go to maintenance mode to close every valve. If not, the sequence will continue to step 3.
c. Step 3 – Preliminary Flow.
1) The pump is started to a specific initial speed set-point for a specific time. After the time has passed, it will continue to step 4. At the same time, the primary chemical pumps are started, supply the chemicals based on dosage set-points. When the timer is done, the sequence will continue to step 4.
d. Step 4 – Opening Recovery Valve.
1) The recovery valve is commanded to open to start flowing water to the distribution system. When the valve gives confirmation of being opened, the sequence will continue to. step 5.
e. Step 5 – Flowing to Distribution/Done.
1) The pump is set to control the flow of water based on a flow set-point. The system will remain in this step, flowing water at a specific set-point until maintenance mode is initiated by the operator at the OIT.

6. Indicators and alarms:
a. As indicated on the Drawings and specified in Section 17100 - Control Strategies.

7. Failure modes:
a. As indicated on the Drawings and specified in Section 17100 - Control Strategies.

3.02 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

3.03 TESTING
A. As specified in Section 17950 - Commissioning for Instrumentation and Controls.

END OF SECTION

Level Measurement: Switches
17201-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17201 (DraftFinal) SECTION 17201
LEVEL MEASUREMENT: SWITCHES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Conductivity probe level switch.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures and Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of calibration instruments.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Examine the complete set of Contract Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions, including:

1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc.

2. Physical conditions:
a. Installation and mounting requirements.
b. Location within the process.
c. Accessories: Verify that required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation.

C. Manufacture instrument facilities certified to the quality standards of ISO 9001 - Quality Systems - Model for Quality Assurance in Design/Development, Production, Installation and Servicing.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.06 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. Project environmental conditions as specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

Level Measurement: Switches
17201-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17201 (DraftFinal)

1.07 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Notify the Engineer if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer’s recommendations or Specifications.

1.08 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

1.09 MAINTENANCE
A. Furnish parts, materials, fluids, etc., necessary for operation, maintenance, and calibration purposes throughout the warranty period. Deliver these supplies before Project Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide instruments identified in the Contract Documents.

2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Provide instruments suitable for the installed Site conditions, including, but not limited to, material compatibility, Site altitude, Site seismic conditions, humidity, and process and ambient temperatures.

2.03 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:

1. Conductivity level switch:
a. Standard applications:
1) Ametek Drexelbrook, Model 6012/6013 probes with Series 5200 relay. 2) E+H, Liquipoint FTW.
3) Warrick Controls, Model 3 series probes with 16 VM relay. b. Intrinsically safe:
1) B/W, Control High Sensitivity Series 5200 N7.
2) Warrick Controls, Model 27.

2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. As specified in this Section, including Attachment A - ISA Datasheet - Level Measurement: Switches.

B. Conductivity level switch:

1. General:
a. Probe type conductivity level switches integrating a control relay, control and reference electrode probes as required, and electrode probe holder.

Electrode probes shall be rigid stainless steel and probe holder pressure tight.

Level Measurement: Switches
17201-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17201 (DraftFinal) b. All components provided by the same manufacturer.

2. Element:
a. Rigid type:
1) For probe lengths of 6 feet and less, provide Type 316 stainless steel rigid probes.
2) Electrode probe shall be threaded at one end to fit electrode holder threads and insulated with 1/32-inch PVC sheath down to 1 inch from the other end.
b. Electrode probe holder.
c. Suspended probes:
1) For probe lengths longer than 6 feet, provide wire suspended probes within a protective plastic shield suspended and PVC insulated wires. 2) Provide suitable adapters for fastening upper end to electrode fitting.

3. Switch: Control relay senses the liquid level by conductance through electrode probes and the process liquid:
a. Provide a solid-state general-purpose control relay designed for single level or differential control.
b. Electrical connection: One 1/2-inch NPT conduit entry. c. Power supply:
1) As indicated in the datasheets.

4. Output:
a. Relay outputs:
1) As indicated in the datasheets.
2) Enclosure:
a) As indicated in the datasheets.
3) Configurable for fail-safe operation.

5. Components:
a. Adjustable time delay on increasing or decreasing level.

2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. FM approval certification or equal when installed in classified areas.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the installation location for the instrument and verify that the instrument will work properly when installed.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

3.03 COMMISSIONING
A. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

Level Measurement: Switches
17201-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17201 (DraftFinal)

3.04 SCHEDULES
A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments.

Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents:

1. Instruments may be as indicated on the Drawings, as specified in the Specifications, or both.

END OF SECTION
Level Measurement: Switches
17201-Attachment A 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17201 (DraftFinal) ATTACHMENT A - ISA DATASHEET - LEVEL MEASUREMENT: SWITCHES

Level Switch
SPECIFICATION 17201

PROJECT INFORMATION

PLANT CAMPUS OAKS & MISTY WOODS

ASR FACILITIES

CUSTOMER CITY OF ROSEVILLE
PROJECT 11843A10_P3 LOCATION ROSEVILLE CA

ELEMENT/SWITCH
GENERAL NOTE: FIELDS SHOWN WITH THE [*] SYMBOL ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE DATASHEET BUT MAY BE REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETE ISA DATASHEETS FOR EACH INSTRUMENT PER ALL SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS.

TAG P&ID SERVICE CHEMICAL TRENCH DRAIN LEVEL SWITCH
WD33-LSHX-3020 13N07 FLUID SODIUM HYPOCHLORIT HAZARDOUS APP N/A POWER [*] WD33-LEXX30209MEASURING PRINCIPLE CONDUCTIVITY ELEM. ENC. CLASS NEMA 4X POWER LOCATION LOOP SET POINT 1/2" ELEM. MATERIAL MFR. STD. OUTPUT RELAY
MOUNTING N/A SWITCH ENCL. CLASS NEMA 4X RELAY FORM SPDT TYPICAL DETAILS NL113 ENCL. MATERIAL MFR. STD. PLC WD31-PLCX-30101

SURGE PROTECTION NO
Notes: MOUNT SO TIP OF PROBE IS 3/8" ABOVE THE FINISHED SURFACE.

TAG P&ID SERVICE CHEMICAL TRENCH DRAIN LEVEL SWITCH
WD33-LSHX-3620 19N07 FLUID SODIUM HYPOCHLORIT HAZARDOUS APP N/A POWER [*] WD33-LEXX36209MEASURING PRINCIPLE CONDUCTIVITY ELEM. ENC. CLASS NEMA 4X POWER LOCATION LOOP SET POINT 1/2" ELEM. MATERIAL MFR. STD. OUTPUT RELAY
MOUNTING N/A SWITCH ENCL. CLASS NEMA 4X RELAY FORM SPDT TYPICAL DETAILS NL113 ENCL. MATERIAL MFR. STD. PLC WD31-PLCX-36101

SURGE PROTECTION NO
Notes: MOUNT SO TIP OF PROBE IS 3/8" ABOVE THE FINISHED SURFACE. 11843A10_P3 17201 -

Page 1 ends

Level Measurement: Radar Pulse Time of Flight (PTOF)
17208-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17208 (DraftFinal) SECTION 17208
LEVEL MEASUREMENT: RADAR PULSE TIME OF FLIGHT (PTOF)
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Non-contact radar (PTOF) level instruments.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Abbreviations:

1. PTOF: Pulse Time of Flight.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures and Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Manufacturer’s representative qualifications as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

C. Owner Training Submittals:

1. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Provide instruments manufactured at facilities certified to the quality standards of ISO 9001.

C. Examine the complete set of Contract Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions, including:

1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc.

2. Physical conditions:
a. Installation and mounting requirements.
b. Location within the process.
c. Accessories: Verify that required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation.

Level Measurement: Radar Pulse Time of Flight (PTOF)
17208-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17208 (DraftFinal)

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.06 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.07 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Notify the Engineer if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer’s recommendations or specifications.

1.08 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide instruments identified in the Contract Documents.

2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Provide instruments suitable for the installed Site conditions, including, but not limited to, material compatibility, Site altitude, Site seismic conditions, humidity, and process and ambient temperatures.

2.03 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:

1. Endress+Hauser, Micropilot FMR51.

2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Pulse Time of Flight:

1. General:
a. Instrument emits radar pulses via a transmitter, with a frequency range of up to 80 GHz.
b. Pulses reflect from the surface being measured and are received back at the instrument via a sensor.
c. Instrument measures the pulse travel time between the transmitter, surface, and receiver to calculate the level.
d. Safety:
1) Shall not generate frequency waves with power levels hazardous to humans.

Level Measurement: Radar Pulse Time of Flight (PTOF)
17208-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17208 (DraftFinal)

2. Performance requirements:
a. Accuracy: Level:
1) 0.25 inch.

3. Element:
a. Level element must conform to the process material compatibility as indicated in Attachment A - ISA Datasheet - Level Measurement: Radar Pulse Time of Flight (PTOF) or the Instrument Index.
b. Connections:
1) Process: Antenna design shall be suitable for mounting in a nozzle as indicated in Attachment A - ISA Datasheet - Level Measurement:

Radar Pulse Time of Flight (PTOF) or the Instrument Index. 2) Design shall be such that product condensation on the antenna shall not affect the performance of the gauge. It shall be possible to choose between parabolic-, cone-, or rod-shaped antennas.

4. Transmitter:
a. Microprocessor-based signal converter/transmitter.
b. Power supply:
1) As indicated in the datasheets.
c. Outputs:
1) As indicated in the datasheets.
d. Backlit digital display for level or volume.
e. Self-diagnostics and automatic data checking.
f. Signal integrity:
1) Immune to radio frequency and electromagnetic interference with field strength of 15 volts/meter or less over a frequency range of 50 Hz to 460 MHz.
2) Able to ignore momentary level spikes or momentary loss of echo and indicate loss of echo condition on indicating transmitter unit. g. Protected terminals and fuses in a separate compartment, which isolates field connection from electronics.
1) Indication: Local - 5-digit display.
h. Enclosure:
1) As indicated in the datasheets.
i. Electrical connection: 1/2-inch male NPT.

2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Software: Provide Windows based PC software for configuration and echo mapping.

B. Provide sun shield for outdoor installations.

C. Configurable additional remote mountable display.

2.06 FINISHES (NOT USED)

2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory calibrate each level transmitter at a facility that is traceable to NIST.

Level Measurement: Radar Pulse Time of Flight (PTOF)
17208-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17208 (DraftFinal) B. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of calibration instruments.

C. FM approval certification or equal when installed in classified areas.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the installation location for the instrument and verify that the instrument will work properly when installed.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Coordinate the installation with trades to ensure that the mechanical system has necessary appurtenances, including weld-o-lets, valves, etc., for proper installation of instruments.

3.03 CALIBRATION AND TESTING
A. As specified in Section 17950 - Commissioning for Instrumentation and Controls.

3.04 OWNER TRAINING
A. Perform Owner Training as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

1. Number of sessions:
a. Operations: 2, 1 hour duration.
b. Maintenance: 2, 1 hour duration.

3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Verify factory calibration of instruments in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions:

1. Return factory calibrated devices to the factory if they do not meet the field verification requirements for calibration.

3.06 SCHEDULES
A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments.

Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents:

1. Instruments may be indicated on the Drawings, specified in the Specifications, or both.

END OF SECTION
Level Measurement: Radar Pulse Time of Flight (PTOF)
17208-Attachment A 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17208 (DraftFinal) ATTACHMENT A - ISA DATASHEET - LEVEL MEASUREMENT:

RADAR PULSE TIME OF FLIGHT (PTOF)

Level Transmitter

PROJECT INFORMATION

PLANT CAMPUS OAKS & MISTY WOODS

ASR FACILITIES

CUSTOMER CITY OF ROSEVILLE
PROJECT 11843A10_P3 LOCATION ROSEVILLE CA
GENERAL NOTE: FIELDS SHOWN WITH THE [*] SYMBOL ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE DATASHEET BUT MAY BE REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETE ISA DATASHEETS FOR EACH INSTRUMENT PER ALL SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS.

GENERAL
TAG WD33-LITX-30201 (WD33-LEXX30201)
SPECIFICATION NUMBER 17208 MEASURING PRINCIPLE RADAR PTOF DRAWING NUMBER 13N04 PLC WD31-PLCX-30101

SERVICE SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE STORAGE

TANK LEVEL ELEMENT
TYPICAL DETAILS NL174

CONNECTION

PROCESS CONNECTION FLANGE MOUNT
FLUID
LEVEL RANGE 0-7 FT 1 IN TEMPERATURE 50 DEG F

ELEMENT
ELEMENT TAG NO. WD33-LEXX-30201 ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4
ELEMENT HAZ. MATERIALS N/A ELEMENT MATERIAL PVDF
SUBMERGENCE DETECTION NO TEMPERATURE COMP. NO

HEATED ELEMENT NO

TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER TAG NO. WD33-LITX-30201 HAZARDOUS APPROVALS N/A MOUNTING REM ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4
POWER [*] OUTPUT 4-20 MA
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 80 DEG F MEASUREMENT APPL LEVEL

SURGE PROTECTION NO
NOTES
IGNORE INT ON P&ID. FMR20-AAPBNVCERRFA+R4Z1 WAS ORDERED FOR WESTBROOK AND SOLARIE. 11843A10_P3 17208

Page 1 ends

Level Transmitter

PROJECT INFORMATION

PLANT CAMPUS OAKS & MISTY WOODS

ASR FACILITIES

CUSTOMER CITY OF ROSEVILLE
PROJECT 11843A10_P3 LOCATION ROSEVILLE CA
GENERAL NOTE: FIELDS SHOWN WITH THE [*] SYMBOL ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE DATASHEET BUT MAY BE REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETE ISA DATASHEETS FOR EACH INSTRUMENT PER ALL SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS.

GENERAL
TAG WD33-LITX-36201 (WD33-LEXX36201)
SPECIFICATION NUMBER 17208 MEASURING PRINCIPLE RADAR PTOF DRAWING NUMBER 19N04 PLC WD31-PLCX-36101

SERVICE SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE STORAGE

TANK LEVEL ELEMENT
TYPICAL DETAILS NL174

CONNECTION

PROCESS CONNECTION FLANGE MOUNT
FLUID
LEVEL RANGE 0-7 FT 1 IN TEMPERATURE 50 DEG F

ELEMENT
ELEMENT TAG NO. WD33-LEXX-36201 ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4
ELEMENT HAZ. MATERIALS N/A ELEMENT MATERIAL PVDF
SUBMERGENCE DETECTION NO TEMPERATURE COMP. NO

HEATED ELEMENT NO

TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER TAG NO. WD33-LITX-36201 HAZARDOUS APPROVALS N/A MOUNTING REM ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4
POWER [*] OUTPUT 4-20 MA
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 80 DEG F MEASUREMENT APPL LEVEL

SURGE PROTECTION NO
NOTES
IGNORE INT ON P&ID. FMR20-AAPBNVCERRFA+R4Z1 WAS ORDERED FOR WESTBROOK AND SOLARIE. 11843A10_P3 17208

Page 2 ends

Flow Measurement: Switches
17301-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17301 (DraftFinal) SECTION 17301
FLOW MEASUREMENT: SWITCHES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Thermal dispersion flow switches.

B. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Drawings.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Sections 01330 - Submittal Procedures and 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all calibration instruments.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Examine the complete set of Contract Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions including:

1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc.

2. Physical conditions:
a. Installation and mounting requirements.
b. Location within the process.
c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation.

3. Notify the Engineer if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer’s recommendations or specifications.

Flow Measurement: Switches
17301-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17301 (DraftFinal)

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Provide instruments suitable for the installed site conditions including, but not limited to, material compatibility, site altitude, site seismic conditions, humidity, and process and ambient temperatures.

1.08 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.09 MAINTENANCE
A. Furnish all parts, materials, fluids, etc. necessary for operation, maintenance, and calibration purposes throughout the warranty period. Deliver all of these supplies before project substantial completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:

1. Thermal dispersion type:
a. Fluid Components International LLC, FLT93. (This was selected at Westbrook and Solaire.)
b. Kayden.

2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. As specified in this Section including Attachment A - ISA Data Sheet - Flow Measurement: Switches.

B. Thermal dispersion type:

1. General:
a. Instrument uses a heated probe and a reference probe. 1) Deviation in the amount of heat measured by the reference probe deviates beyond the setpoint an adjustable relay closes. 2) Switch:
a) Micro-processor based with continuous self-diagnostics, “Smart Heater” to prevent sensor failure, no mechanical jumpers or trim pots, and a 3-year warranty.

Flow Measurement: Switches
17301-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17301 (DraftFinal) 3) Seal water applications:
a) For clean water flow applications in line sizes 1-inch or smaller, provide in-line pre-assembled flow switch assembly with NPT process connections.

2. Performance requirements:
1) Accuracy: Within 2 degrees Fahrenheit.
b. Repeatability: Within 1 percent of setpoint range.
c. Response time: 0.5 to 2.5 seconds.
d. Adjustable bypass delay timer.
e. Adjustable range.

3. Switch characteristics:
a. Exposed parts: Powder coated aluminum housing.
b. Wetted parts:
1) Materials as recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.
c. Power supply:
1) 120 VAC.
2) Power consumption: 13 VA maximum.
3) Operating temperature range: -40 degrees Fahrenheit to 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
d. Enclosure:
1) Non-hazardous area:
a) NEMA Type 4X.

2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide sunshades for outdoor installations.

2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Factory calibrate each instrument with a minimum 3-point calibration or according to Manufacturer’s standard at a facility that is traceable to the NIST.

1. Submit calibration data sheets to the Engineer at least 30 days before shipment of the instruments to the project site.

C. FM approval certification or equal when installed in classified areas.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the installation location for the instrument and verify that the instrument will work properly when installed.

1. Notify the Engineer promptly if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer’s recommendations or specifications.

Flow Measurement: Switches
17301-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17301 (DraftFinal)

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

3.04 ADJUSTING
A. As specified in Section 17950 - Commissioning for Instrumentation and Controls.

3.05 CLEANING
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

3.06 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

3.07 PROTECTION
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

3.08 SCHEDULES
A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments.

Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents:

1. Instruments may be indicated on the Drawings, specified in the Specifications or both.

END OF SECTION
Flow Measurement: Switches
17301-Attachment A 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17301 (DraftFinal) ATTACHMENT A - ISA DATASHEET - FLOW MEASUREMENT: SWITCHES

Flow Switch
SPECIFICATION 17301

PROJECT INFORMATION

PLANT CAMPUS OAKS & MISTY WOODS

ASR FACILITIES

CUSTOMER CITY OF ROSEVILLE
PROJECT 11843A10_P3 LOCATION ROSEVILLE CA

ELEMENT/SWITCH
GENERAL NOTE: FIELDS SHOWN WITH THE [*] SYMBOL ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE DATASHEET BUT MAY BE REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETE ISA DATASHEETS FOR EACH INSTRUMENT PER ALL SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS.

TAG P&ID SERVICE PRELUBE FLOW SWITCH
WD34-FSLX-3011 13N01 FLUID WATER HAZARDOUS APP N/A POWER 120VAC-1P WD34-FEXX30113MEASURING PRINCIPLE THERMAL ELEM. ENC. CLASS NEMA 4 POWER LOCATION WD31-VFDX-30101 SET POINT 7 GPM SWITCH ENCL. CLASS NEMA 4 OUTPUT RELAY
PROCESS CONNECTION 3/4" M-NPT PRESSURE 80 PSI RELAY FORM SPDT CONNECTION MATERIAL PVC TEMPERATURE 50 DEG F PLC WD31-PLCX-30101 INSERTION LENGTH 0.375" VISCOSITY 1 SURGE PROTECTION YES TYPICAL DETAILS NF111
Notes 0-40 GPM RANGE MINIMUM

TAG P&ID SERVICE PRELUBE FLOW SWITCH
WD34-FSLX-3611 19N01 FLUID WATER HAZARDOUS APP N/A POWER 120VAC-1P WD34-FEXX36113MEASURING PRINCIPLE THERMAL ELEM. ENC. CLASS NEMA 4 POWER LOCATION WD31-VFDX-36101 SET POINT 7 GPM SWITCH ENCL. CLASS NEMA 4 OUTPUT RELAY
PROCESS CONNECTION 3/4" M-NPT PRESSURE 80 PSI RELAY FORM SPDT CONNECTION MATERIAL PVC TEMPERATURE 50 DEG F PLC WD31-PLCX-36101 INSERTION LENGTH 0.375" VISCOSITY 1 SURGE PROTECTION YES TYPICAL DETAILS NF111
Notes 0-40 GPM RANGE MINIMUM
11843A10_P3 17301 -

Page 1 ends

Flow Measurement: Magnetic Flowmeters
17302-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17302 (DraftFinal) SECTION 17302
FLOW MEASUREMENT: MAGNETIC FLOWMETERS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Full-body magnetic flowmeters.

B. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Drawings.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1. International Organization for Standardization (ISO):
a. 9000 - Quality management systems -- Fundamentals and vocabulary. b. 17025 - General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories.

2. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).

3. NSF International (NSF).

1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Sections 01330 - Submittal Procedures and 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Include sizing information from the manufacturer that includes:

1. Chart of the measurement error from zero to maximum measured volumetric flow range indicated in data sheets.

2. Indication of all input parameters and their values used in the calculations.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Examine the complete set of Contract Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions including:

1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc.

2. Physical conditions:
a. Installation and mounting requirements.
b. Location within the process.

Flow Measurement: Magnetic Flowmeters
17302-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17302 (DraftFinal) c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation.

3. Notify the Engineer if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer’s recommendations or specifications.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems

1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.08 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.09 MAINTENANCE
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following, no equal:

1. Endress+Hauser:
a. Promag W flowtube with 500 series transmitter.
b. Promag H flowtube with 500 series transmitter.

2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. As specified in this Section including Attachment A - ISA Data Sheet - Flow Measurement: Magnetic Flowmeters.

B. Magnetic flowmeter:

1. General:
a. Include for each magnetic flow metering system:
1) A metering tube with electrodes (sensor).
2) Signal cable.
3) Transmitter integral or remote as indicated on the Drawings. 4) Flowmeter grounding rings.

2. Element:
a. Metering tube:
1) Per Attachment A - ISA Data Sheet - Flow Measurement: Magnetic Flowmeters.

Flow Measurement: Magnetic Flowmeters
17302-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17302 (DraftFinal) 2) Liner material in conformance with:
a) Manufacturer’s recommendations for the intended service. 3) Electrodes type and material in conformance with:
a) Manufacturer’s recommendations for the intended service. 4) Meter terminal housing NEMA Type 4, unless installed in locations such as vaults that will experience submergence. In those applications NEMA 6P is required.
a) Unless specifically noted otherwise in Attachment A - ISA Data Sheet - Flow Measurement: Magnetic Flowmeters.
5) Meter coating consisting of epoxy painted finish.
6) Components:
a) 2 grounding rings:
(1) Which are in conformance with the manufacturer’s bore and material recommendation for the meter’s intended service.

3. Transmitter:
a. Power supply:
1) As indicated in the data sheets.
2) Power consumption: 60 VA maximum.
b. Outputs:
1) As noted in Attachment A - ISA Data Sheet - Flow Measurement:

Magnetic Flowmeters.
c. Microprocessor-based signal converter/transmitter.
d. Utilize DC pulse technique to drive flux-producing coils. e. Contain a 6-digit display for flow rate, percent of span, and totalizer. f. Operator keypad interface.
g. Integral zero return to provide consistent zero output signals in response to an external dry contact closure.
h. Integral low flow cut-off zero return.
i. Programmable parameters including:
1) Meter size.
2) Full-scale flow rate.
3) Magnetic field frequency.
4) Time constant.
j. Data retention for a minimum of 5 years without auxiliary main or battery power.
k. Self-diagnostics and automatic data checking.
l. Protected terminals and fuses in a separate compartment which isolates field connection from electronics.
m. Ambient operating temperature limits of -5 to 140 degrees Fahrenheit (-20 to 60 degrees Celsius).
n. Enclosure:
1) Non-hazardous area:
a) NEMA Type 4.
2) For more information, see Attachment A - ISA Data Sheet - Flow Measurement: Magnetic Flowmeters.
o. The transmitter should support commissioning options via a service interface or via an internal web server accessible through an RJ-45 Ethernet port.
p. The Transmitter should retain all setup parameters and accumulated measurements internally in non-volatile memory in the event of power failure.

Flow Measurement: Magnetic Flowmeters
17302-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17302 (DraftFinal)

2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide stainless steel tags for each instrument. Tags shall be labeled as specified in the Contract Documents.

B. Provide sunshades for all transmitters located outdoors.

C. Provide galvanic isolation gaskets, nylon/Teflon™ flange bolt insulation bushings and nylon washers on all meters installed on pipes with cathodic protection.

D. Furnish 1 spool piece for every size of magnetic flow tube being provided.

2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Factory calibrate each flow metering system at a facility that is traceable to the NIST.

1. ISO-17025 accredited test facility with certified accuracy traceable to NIST.

C. Evidence of accreditation shall originate from a national verification agency such as A2LA.

D. FM approval certification or equal when installed in classified areas.

E. A real-time computer generated printout of the actual calibration date indication actual velocities and as read values of the flow tube.

1. Flow calibration report of the manufacturers flow lab calibration procedure shall be shipped with the meter system.

2. Minimum calibration shall be a 3 point calibration including 1, 3, and 10 feet per second velocities for every meter and transmitter system.

3. Manufacturer shall archive all calibration reports for future reference.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. For instruments located outdoors or where instrument elements and transmitters are separated by conduit located outside the building envelope, provide surge protection devices at the transmitters.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Provide manufacturer’s services to perform installation inspection.

Flow Measurement: Magnetic Flowmeters
17302-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17302 (DraftFinal)

3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Field verification:

1. Verify factory calibration of all instruments in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

2. The Transmitter and sensor to include a method to verify flow meter performance to the original manufacturer specifications.

3. Verification should be traceable to factory calibration using a third party, attested onboard system pursuant to ISO standards.

4. The Verification report should be compliant to common quality systems such as ISO 9000 to prove reliability of the meter specified accuracy.

5. Return factory calibrated devices to the factory if they do not meet the field verification requirements for calibration.

3.04 CLEANING
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

3.05 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Demonstrate performance of all instruments to the Engineer before commissioning.

3.06 PROTECTION
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

3.07 SCHEDULES
A. Instrument Data Sheets included in this Section.

B. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments.

C. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents:

1. Instruments may be indicated on the Drawings, specified in the Specifications, or both.

END OF SECTION

Flow Measurement: Magnetic Flowmeters
17302-Attachment A 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17302 (DraftFinal) ATTACHMENT A - ISA DATASHEET - FLOW MEASUREMENT: TRANSMITTER

Magnetic Flow Transmitter

PROJECT INFORMATION

PLANT CAMPUS OAKS & MISTY WOODS

ASR FACILITIES

CUSTOMER CITY OF ROSEVILLE
PROJECT 11843A10_P3 LOCATION ROSEVILLE CA
GENERAL NOTE: FIELDS SHOWN WITH THE [*] SYMBOL ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE DATASHEET BUT MAY BE REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETE ISA DATASHEETS FOR EACH INSTRUMENT PER ALL SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS.

GENERAL
TAG WD34-FITX-30105 (WD34-FEXX30105)

MEASURING PRINCIPLE MAGNETIC
SPECIFICATION NUMBER 17302 PLC WD31-PLCX-30101
DRAWING NUMBER 13N01 POWER LOCATION WD31-PLCP-30101

SERVICE ASR WELL PUMP

PRELUBE/TRICKLE FLOW ELEMENT
TYPICAL DETAIL(S) NF130, NF136

CONNECTION
LINE SIZE 3/4" PROCESS CONNECTION ANSI 150
LINE MATERIAL PVC PROCESS CONN. MATERIAL STAINLESS STEEL FLUID
FLUID WATER PRESSURE 125 PSI
NOMINAL FLOW 25 GPM TEMPERATURE 50 DEG F
FLOW RANGE 0-40 GPM VISCOSITY 1
CONDUCTIVITY 1

ELEMENT
ELEMENT TAG NO. WD34-FEXX-30105 PROCESS CONNECTION ANSI 150 ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4 LINER MATERIAL HARD RUBBER

HAZARDOUS APPROVALS N/A VACUUM POSSIBILITY NO

TUBE SIZE FULL BORE ELECTRODE TYPE FLUSH
TUBE MATERIAL MFR. STD. ELECTRODE MATERIAL 316 SST

TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER TAG NO. WD34-FITX-30105 HAZARDOUS APPROVALS N/A

MOUNTING INT EMPTY PIPE DETECTION YES
ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4 BI DIRECTIONAL FLOW NO
POWER 120VAC-1P PULSE OUTPUT YES
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 80 DEG F RELAY OPTIONS YES
OUTPUT 4-20 MA POTTED ELECTRONICS NO
SURGE PROTECTION NO CATHODIC PROT. LINE NO
NOTES
PROCESS CONNECTION SHALL HAVE A MATERIAL COMPATIBILITY RATING OF "GOOD" OR GREATER. 11843A10_P3 17302

Page 1 ends

Magnetic Flow Transmitter

PROJECT INFORMATION

PLANT CAMPUS OAKS & MISTY WOODS

ASR FACILITIES

CUSTOMER CITY OF ROSEVILLE
PROJECT 11843A10_P3 LOCATION ROSEVILLE CA
GENERAL NOTE: FIELDS SHOWN WITH THE [*] SYMBOL ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE DATASHEET BUT MAY BE REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETE ISA DATASHEETS FOR EACH INSTRUMENT PER ALL SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS.

GENERAL
TAG WD34-FITX-36104 (WD34-FEXX36104)

MEASURING PRINCIPLE MAGNETIC
SPECIFICATION NUMBER 17302 PLC WD31-PLCX-36101
DRAWING NUMBER 19N02 POWER LOCATION WD31-PCMP-36101

SERVICE AQUIFER STORAGE/RECOVERY

FLOW ELEMENT
TYPICAL DETAIL(S) NF130, NF136

CONNECTION
LINE SIZE 12" PROCESS CONNECTION ANSI 150
LINE MATERIAL PVC PROCESS CONN. MATERIAL STAINLESS STEEL FLUID
FLUID WATER PRESSURE 125 PSI
NOMINAL FLOW 2,500 GPM TEMPERATURE 50 DEG F
FLOW RANGE 0-3000 GPM VISCOSITY 1
CONDUCTIVITY 1

ELEMENT
ELEMENT TAG NO. WD34-FEXX-36104 PROCESS CONNECTION ANSI 150 ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4X LINER MATERIAL HARD RUBBER

HAZARDOUS APPROVALS N/A VACUUM POSSIBILITY NO

TUBE SIZE FULL BORE ELECTRODE TYPE FLUSH
TUBE MATERIAL MFR. STD. ELECTRODE MATERIAL 316 SST

TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER TAG NO. WD34-FITX-36104 HAZARDOUS APPROVALS N/A

MOUNTING INT EMPTY PIPE DETECTION YES
ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4 BI DIRECTIONAL FLOW YES
POWER 120VAC-1P PULSE OUTPUT YES
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 80 DEG F RELAY OPTIONS YES
OUTPUT 4-20 MA POTTED ELECTRONICS NO
SURGE PROTECTION NO CATHODIC PROT. LINE NO
NOTES
PROCESS CONNECTION SHALL HAVE A MATERIAL COMPATIBILITY RATING OF "GOOD" OR GREATER. 11843A10_P3 17302

Page 2 ends

Magnetic Flow Transmitter

PROJECT INFORMATION

PLANT CAMPUS OAKS & MISTY WOODS

ASR FACILITIES

CUSTOMER CITY OF ROSEVILLE
PROJECT 11843A10_P3 LOCATION ROSEVILLE CA
GENERAL NOTE: FIELDS SHOWN WITH THE [*] SYMBOL ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE DATASHEET BUT MAY BE REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETE ISA DATASHEETS FOR EACH INSTRUMENT PER ALL SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS.

GENERAL
TAG WD34-FITX-36105 (WD34-FEXX36105)

MEASURING PRINCIPLE MAGNETIC
SPECIFICATION NUMBER 17302 PLC WD31-PLCX-36101
DRAWING NUMBER 19N01 POWER LOCATION WD31-PLCP-36101

SERVICE ASR WELL PUMP

PRELUBE/TRICKLE FLOW ELEMENT
TYPICAL DETAIL(S) NF130, NF136

CONNECTION
LINE SIZE 3/4" PROCESS CONNECTION ANSI 150
LINE MATERIAL PCV PROCESS CONN. MATERIAL STAINLESS STEEL FLUID
FLUID WATER PRESSURE 125 PSI
NOMINAL FLOW 25 GPM TEMPERATURE 50 DEG F
FLOW RANGE 0-40 GPM VISCOSITY 1
CONDUCTIVITY 1

ELEMENT
ELEMENT TAG NO. WD34-FEXX-36105 PROCESS CONNECTION ANSI 150 ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4X LINER MATERIAL HARD RUBBER

HAZARDOUS APPROVALS N/A VACUUM POSSIBILITY NO

TUBE SIZE FULL BORE ELECTRODE TYPE FLUSH
TUBE MATERIAL MFR. STD. ELECTRODE MATERIAL 316 SST

TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER TAG NO. WD34-FITX-36105 HAZARDOUS APPROVALS N/A

MOUNTING INT EMPTY PIPE DETECTION YES
ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4 BI DIRECTIONAL FLOW NO
POWER 120VAC-1P PULSE OUTPUT YES
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 80 DEG F RELAY OPTIONS YES
OUTPUT 4-20 MA POTTED ELECTRONICS NO
SURGE PROTECTION NO CATHODIC PROT. LINE NO
NOTES
PROCESS CONNECTION SHALL HAVE A MATERIAL COMPATIBILITY RATING OF "GOOD" OR GREATER. 11843A10_P3 17302

Page 3 ends

Flow Measurement: Rotameters (Variable Area Flowmeters) 17316-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17316 (DraftFinal) SECTION 17316
FLOW MEASUREMENT: ROTAMETERS (VARIABLE AREA FLOWMETERS) PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Rotameters (variable area flowmeters).

1.02 REFERENCES
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures and Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Examine the complete set of Contract Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions, including:

1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc.

2. Physical conditions:
a. Installation and mounting requirements.
b. Location within the process.
c. Accessories: Verify that required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.06 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.07 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Notify the Engineer if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer’s recommendations or specifications.

Flow Measurement: Rotameters (Variable Area Flowmeters) 17316-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17316 (DraftFinal)

1.08 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide instruments identified in the Contract Documents.

2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Provide instruments suitable for the installed Site conditions, including, but not limited to, material compatibility, Site altitude, Site seismic conditions, humidity, and process and ambient temperatures.

2.03 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:

1. ABB.

2. Brooks.

3. King Instrument Co.

2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Rotameters:

1. General:
a. Variable area type flowmeters with local flow indication. b. Material construction:
1) As indicated in the datasheet.

2. Performance requirements:
a. Flow range:
1) As specified in instrument datasheets or instrument index. b. Accuracy:
1) Glass tube: Within 2.0 percent of range.
2) Metal tube: Within 5.0 percent of range.
3) Repeatability: 0.50 percent of range.

3. Element:
a. Flow tube:
1) Glass tube: Borosilicate glass, or as required to be compatible with the process conditions.
b. Metal tube with magnetic follower:
1) Type 316 stainless steel.
c. Turndown: 10 to 1.
d. Process temperature:
1) As indicated in the datasheet.
e. Maximum process pressure:
1) As indicated in the datasheet.
2) Range:
a) As indicated in the datasheet.

Flow Measurement: Rotameters (Variable Area Flowmeters) 17316-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17316 (DraftFinal) 3) Polycarbonate operator protection shield.
f. Float:
1) Design to provide the widest possible immunity band change for lowest pressure loss.
2) Metal tube rotameters: Float with encapsulated magnet.

4. Components:
a. Seals: O-rings or packing glands fully compatible with process fluid. b. Integral needle valve for flow control.

5. Scale:
a. Metal tube: Dial indicator with rotatable magnet coupled to magnet encapsulated in rotameter float.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the installation location for the instrument and verify that the instrument will work properly when installed.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Coordinate the installation with trades to ensure that the mechanical system has necessary appurtenances, including weld-o-lets, valves, etc., for proper installation of instruments.

3.03 CALIBRATION AND TESTING
A. As specified in Section 17950 - Commissioning for Instrumentation and Controls.

3.04 SCHEDULES
A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments.

Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents:

1. Instruments may be indicated on the Drawings, specified in the Specifications, or both.

END OF SECTION

Flow Measurement: Rotameters (Variable Area Flowmeters) 17316-Attachment A 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17316 (DraftFinal) ATTACHMENT A - ISA DATASHEET - FLOW MEASUREMENT:

ROTAMETERS (VARIABLE AREA FLOWMETERS)

Rotameter
SPECIFICATION 17316

PROJECT INFORMATION

PLANT CAMPUS OAKS & MISTY WOODS

ASR FACILITIES

CUSTOMER CITY OF ROSEVILLE
PROJECT 11843A10_P3 LOCATION ROSEVILLE CA

ELEMENT/SWITCH
GENERAL NOTE: FIELDS SHOWN WITH THE [*] SYMBOL ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE DATASHEET BUT MAY BE REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETE ISA DATASHEETS FOR EACH INSTRUMENT PER ALL SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS.

TAG P&ID SERVICE PROPELLER TURBINE
WD34-FIXX-30103 13N01 FLUID WATER TYPICAL DETAILS [*] FLOW RANGE [*] MEASURING PRINCIPLE VARIABLE AREA FLOW PRESSURE 150 PSIG VISCOSITY 1 LINE SIZE 2" TEMPERATURE 50 DEG F SEAL MATERIAL EPDM
LINE MATERIAL PVC PROCESS CONN. F-NPT TUBE MATERIAL [*] PROCESS CONN. MAT'L STAINLESS STEEL

TAG P&ID SERVICE PRELUBE ROTAMETER
WD34-FIXX-30108 13N01 FLUID WATER TYPICAL DETAILS [*] FLOW RANGE 0-30 GPM MEASURING PRINCIPLE VARIABLE AREA FLOW PRESSURE 100 PSI VISCOSITY N/A LINE SIZE 3/4" TEMPERATURE 50 DEG F SEAL MATERIAL FLUOROELASTOMER RUBBE LINE MATERIAL PVC PROCESS CONN. F-NPT TUBE MATERIAL POLYSULFONE PLASTIC PROCESS CONN. MAT'L STAINLESS STEEL

TAG P&ID SERVICE PRELUBE ROTAMETER
WD34-FIXX-36108 19N01 FLUID WATER TYPICAL DETAILS [*] FLOW RANGE 0-30 GPM MEASURING PRINCIPLE VARIABLE AREA FLOW PRESSURE 100 PSI VISCOSITY N/A LINE SIZE 3/4" TEMPERATURE 50 DEG F SEAL MATERIAL FLUOROELASTOMER RUBBE LINE MATERIAL PVC PROCESS CONN. F-NPT TUBE MATERIAL POLYSULFONE PLASTIC PROCESS CONN. MAT'L STAINLESS STEEL
11843A10_P3 17316

Page 1 ends

Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Diaphragm Seals
17401-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17401 (DraftFinal) SECTION 17401
PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT: DIAPHRAGM SEALS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Diaphragm seals.

B. Provide all seals identified in the Contract Documents.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Sections 01330 - Submittal Procedures and 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Additional requirements:

1. Product data:
a. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.
b. Seal type.
c. Body materials.
d. Diaphragm material.
e. Fill fluid type.
f. Seal size.
g. Options.
h. Process connection.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Examine the complete set of Contract Documents and verify the compatibility with the installed conditions including:

1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc.

2. Physical conditions:
a. Installation and mounting requirements.
b. Location within the process.

Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Diaphragm Seals
17401-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17401 (DraftFinal) c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation.

3. C.Notify the Engineer if any installation condition does not meet the manufacturer’s recommendations or specifications.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.08 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.09 MAINTENANCE
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Provide spare annular seal for every size indicated in the project.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Diaphragm seals:

1. For chemical applications, liquids containing solids, and liquids with pulsating flow having pressures less than or equal to 15 pounds per square inch gauge:

One of the following or equal:
a. Ashcroft:
1) Flushing connection: Type 741.
2) Without flushing connection: Type 740.
b. Mansfield and Green:
1) Flushing connection: Type SGT.
2) Without flushing connection: Type SBT.
c. Wika, Type L990.40.
d. Emerson, Rosemount.

2. For chemical applications, liquids containing solids, and liquids with pulsating flow having pressures greater than or equal to 15 pounds per square inch gauge: One of the following or equal:
a. Ashcroft:
1) Flushing connection: Type 201.
2) Without flushing connection: Type 200.
3) Saddle mount: Type 205.

Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Diaphragm Seals
17401-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17401 (DraftFinal) b. Mansfield and Green:
1) Flushing connection: Type SG.
2) Without flushing connection: Type SB.
3) Saddle mount: Type SJ.
c. Wika:
1) Type L990.10.
2) Saddle mount: L910.ZA.

2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Diaphragm seals:

1. General:
a. Diaphragm seal and pressure instrument shall be assembled by pressure instrument manufacturer and shipped as an assembly.

2. Requirements:
a. Seal type:
1) Metallic diaphragm: Welded to upper housing.
2) Elastomer diaphragm: Bonded to upper housing.
b. Process connection: 1 inch NPT.
c. Instrument connection: 1/2inch NPT.
1) Material Construction: Type 316 stainless steel.
d. Provide 1/4-inch flushing connection in diaphragm lower housing or provide flushing ring.
e. Flush port plug: Same material of construction as diaphragm lower housing.
f. Provide fill/bleed connection.
g. Mounting: As indicated in the Contract Documents.
h. Provide Type 316 stainless steel armored capillary for all remote installations.
i. Nuts and bolts: Type 316 stainless steel.
j. Materials of construction:
1) Chlorine:
a) Diaphragm: Tantalum.
b) Lower housing: Hastelloy C.
c) Upper housing: Manufacturer’s standard.
d) Fill fluid: Halocarbon.
2) Fluorosilicic acid:
a) Diaphragm: Viton™.
b) Lower housing: PVC.
c) Upper housing: Manufacturer’s standard.
d) Fill fluid: Silicone oil.
3) Engineer’s approval.

2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide field fill kits.

2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Diaphragm Seals
17401-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17401 (DraftFinal) PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation System.

B. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has all necessary appurtenances including weld-o-lets, valves, etc. for proper installation of instruments.

C. Do not use Teflon™ thread seal tape on pressure instruments with silicone oil fill fluid.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

3.03 CLEANING
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

3.04 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

3.05 PROTECTION
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

END OF SECTION
Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Instrument Valves
17402-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17402 (DraftFinal) SECTION 17402
PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT: INSTRUMENT VALVES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Valve manifolds and instrument valves.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01330 - Submittal Procedures and 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Additional requirements:

1. Product data:
a. Valve type.
b. Body material.
c. Size.
d. Options.

2. Shop drawings:
a. Mounting details for all manifold valves.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Examine the complete set of Contract Documents and verify that the valves are compatible with the installed conditions including:

1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc.

2. Physical conditions:
a. Installation and mounting requirements.
b. Location within the process.
c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation.

C. Provide valves manufactured at facilities certified to the quality standards of ISO 9001.

Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Instrument Valves
17402-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17402 (DraftFinal)

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Protect valve manifolds and protective coatings from damage during handling and installation. Repair coating where damaged.

1.06 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. Project environmental conditions as specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.07 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Notify the Engineer if any installation condition does not meet the valve manufacturer’s recommendations or specifications.

1.08 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

1.09 MAINTENANCE
A. Furnish all parts, materials, fluids, etc. necessary for operation, maintenance, and calibration purposes throughout the warranty period. Deliver all of these supplies before project substantial completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide all valves identified in the Contract Documents.

2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Provide valves suitable for the installed site conditions including, but not limited to, material compatibility, process, and ambient temperatures.

2.03 MANUFACTURERS
A. Valve manifold:

1. One of the following or equal:
a. Anderson Greenwood.
b. Hex Valve.
c. Noshok.
d. Emerson, Rosemount.

Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Instrument Valves
17402-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17402 (DraftFinal) B. Block and bleed valve:

1. One of the following or equal:
a. Anderson Greenwood.
b. Hex Valve.

C. Gauge valve:

1. One of the following or equal:
a. Anderson Greenwood.
b. Hex Valve.

D. Level sensor isolation valve:

1. One of the following or equal:
a. Indu-Tech, Level Sensor Isolation Valve.
b. DeZURIK, Level Sensor Isolation Valve.
c. Tyco, Rovalve Isolation Knife Gate Valve.

2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Valve manifolds:

1. General:
a. Provide 2-valve, 3-valve, blowdown type 5-valve, or metering type 5-valve manifolds as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Valve manifolds shall have one piece bonnet with a metal-to-metal seal to the valve body below the bonnet threads.

2. Requirements:
a. Bonnet lock pin to prevent accidental loosening.
b. Gas leak tested metal-to-metal hard seat design for hard seat valves. c. Gas leak tested soft seat design with replaceable seat for soft seat valves. d. Manifold valves shall have straight through portion for bi-directional flow and easy roddable cleaning.
e. Manifold valves shall allow for direct or remote instrument mounting. f. Shall be able to withstand pressures up to 6,000 psi for soft seat valves and 10,000 psi for hard seat valves at maximum 200 degrees Fahrenheit. g. Materials of construction:
1) Body material: Type 316 stainless steel.
2) O-ring: Teflon™.
h. 2-Valve manifolds:
1) 1 isolation valve and 1 drain/vent and calibration valve. i. 3-Valve manifolds:
1) 2 isolation valves and 1 equalizing valve for differential pressure applications.
2) Plugged vent connections used for vent/drain or calibration. j. Blowdown 5-valve manifold:
1) 2 isolation valves, 1 equalizing valve, 2 blowdown valves for differential pressure applications.
k. Metering 5-valve manifold:
1) 2 isolation valves, 2 equalizing valves, 1 vent/drain and calibration valve for differential pressure applications.

Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Instrument Valves
17402-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17402 (DraftFinal) B. Block and bleed valves:

1. General:
a. Valve shall provide process isolation and venting/draining capabilities. b. Gas leak tested metal-to-metal hard seat design for hard seat valves. c. Gas leak tested soft seat design with replaceable seat for soft seat valves. d. Valve shall not be used with fluids with high solids content, such as raw wastewater or sludge.

2. Requirements:
a. Materials of construction:
1) Body material: Type 316 stainless steel.
2) O-ring: Teflon™.

C. Gauge valves:

1. General:
a. Valve shall provide process isolation from pressure instrument. b. Gas leak tested, metal-to-metal hard seat design for hard seat valves. c. Gas leak tested soft seat design with replaceable seat for soft seat valves.

2. Requirements:
a. Materials of construction:
1) Body material: Type 316 stainless steel.
2) O-ring: Teflon™.

D. Level sensor isolation valves:

1. General:
a. Valve shall provide process isolation from level diaphragm. b. Gas leak tested, metal-to-metal hard seat design for hard seat valves. c. Gas leak tested soft seat design with replaceable seat for soft seat valves.

2. Requirements:
a. Materials of construction:
1) Body material: Type 316 stainless steel.
2) Flange diameter size: 3 inches.

2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide tube fitting, female NPT, or pipe butt weld connections if necessary.

B. Provide stainless steel concentric or eccentric pipe nipples when necessary.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the installation location and verify the valve will work properly when installed.

Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Instrument Valves
17402-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17402 (DraftFinal)

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has all necessary appurtenances including weld-o-lets, valves, etc. for proper installation of all valves.

3.03 COMMISSIONING
A. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

END OF SECTION

Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Switches
17403-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17403 (DraftFinal) SECTION 17403
PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT: SWITCHES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Pressure/vacuum switches.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures and Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Product data:

1. Accessories.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Examine the complete set of Contract Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions including:

1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc.

2. Physical conditions:
a. Installation and mounting requirements.
b. Location within the process.
c. Accessories: Verify that required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.06 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. Project environmental conditions as specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Switches
17403-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17403 (DraftFinal)

1.07 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Notify the Engineer if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer’s recommendations or specifications.

1.08 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

1.09 MAINTENANCE
A. Furnish parts, materials, fluids, etc. necessary for operation, maintenance, and calibration purposes throughout the warranty period. Deliver these supplies before project substantial completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide instruments specified in the Contract Documents.

2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Provide instruments suitable for the installed site conditions, including, but not limited to, material compatibility, site altitude, site seismic conditions, humidity, and process and ambient temperatures.

2.03 MANUFACTURERS
A. Mechanical type pressure switch: One of the following or equal:

1. Ashcroft, B Series Type 400. (This was selected for Westbrook and Solaire.)

2. United Electric Controls Series 400.

3. ASCO, S-Series.

2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. As specified in this Section including Attachment A - ISA Data Sheet - Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Switches.

B. Mechanical type pressure switches:

1. General:
a. Pressure switch shall be diaphragm or diaphragm-sealed piston type.

2. Performance requirements:
a. Pressure range:
1) As shown on the P&IDs.
b. Accuracy:
1) Within 1.0 percent of range.
c. Repeatability:
1) Within 1.0 percent of range.

Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Switches
17403-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17403 (DraftFinal)

3. Element:
a. Type: Diaphragm, diaphragm-sealed piston, or Bourdon® tube. b. Overpressure:
1) Minimum 130 percent of maximum range pressure without damage to switch or sensing element.
2) Minimum 400 percent of nominal range without leakage or rupture. c. Sensing element shall not require ambient temperature compensation. d. Wetted materials: Stainless steel.
e. Setpoint:
1) Single.
2) Switch shall activate at setpoint on increasing pressure for high-pressure alarm applications and on decreasing pressure for low-pressure alarm applications.
3) Fixed deadband.
f. Switch elements:
1) Snap acting.
a) Single-pole double-throw (SPDT).
2) Rated at 5 A, 125/250 VAC.
a) Automatic reset type.
g. Enclosure: Epoxy coated:
1) Non-hazardous area:
a) NEMA Type 4X.
2) For more information, see Attachment A - ISA Data Sheet - Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Switches.
h. Switch mounting:
1) Process connection: 1/2-inch NPT.

4. Components:
1) Provide all necessary hardware for pressure switch mounting.

2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Pulsation dampeners and snubbers:

1. Provide pulsation dampener or snubber with each pressure switch installed on discharge of positive displacement type pump.

2. Materials: Stainless steel.

3. Mount pulsation dampener or snubber integrally to the pressure switch.

4. Connection: 1/2-inch NPT.

B. Provide diaphragm seals as specified in datasheets or as indicated on the Drawings and as specified in Section 17401 - Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Diaphragm and Annular Seals:

1. Diaphragm seal and pressure switch shall be assembled by manufacturer and shipped as an assembly.

C. Furnish block and bleed valves as specified in Section 17402 - Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Instrument Valves.

D. Furnish gauge valves as specified in Section 17402 - Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Instrument Valves.

Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Switches
17403-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17403 (DraftFinal) E. Provide stainless steel tags for each instrument. Tags shall be labeled as specified in the Contract Documents.

2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory calibrate each instrument with a minimum 3-point calibration or according to Manufacturer’s standard at a facility that is traceable to the NIST.

1. Submit calibration datasheets to the Engineer at least 30 days before shipment of the instruments to the project site.

B. FM approval certification or equal when installed in classified areas.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Coordinate the installation with trades to ensure that the mechanical system has necessary appurtenances including weld-o-lets, valves, etc., for proper installation of instruments.

3.02 COMMISSIONING
A. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Verify factory calibration of instruments in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions:

1. Return factory calibrated devices to the factory if they do not meet the field verification requirements for calibration.

3.04 SCHEDULES
A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments.

Provide all instruments specified in the Contract Documents:

1. Instruments may be indicated on the Drawings, specified in the Specifications, or both.

END OF SECTION
Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Switches
17403-Attachment A 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17403 (DraftFinal) ATTACHMENT A - ISA DATASHEET - PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT: SWITCHES

Pressure Switch
SPECIFICATION 17403

PROJECT INFORMATION

PLANT CAMPUS OAKS & MISTY WOODS

ASR FACILITIES

CUSTOMER CITY OF ROSEVILLE
PROJECT 11843A10_P3 LOCATION ROSEVILLE CA

ELEMENT/SWITCH
GENERAL NOTE: FIELDS SHOWN WITH THE [*] SYMBOL ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE DATASHEET BUT MAY BE REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETE ISA DATASHEETS FOR EACH INSTRUMENT PER ALL SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS.

TAG P&ID SERVICE ASR WELL RECOVERY PRESSURE SWITCH HI HI WD34-PSHH-3010 13N02 FLUID WATER HAZARDOUS APP N/A POWER [*] WD34-PEXX30107FLUID TEMPERATURE 50 DEG F ELEM. ENCL. CLASS NEMA 4X POWER LOCATION LOOP MEASURING PRINCIPLE PRESSURE ELEMENT MATERIAL 316L SST OUTPUT RELAY SET POINT @ ~ 125 PSIG SWITCH ENCL. CLASS NEMA 4 RELAY FORM SPDT ADJUSTABLE RANGE 100-150 PSIG ENCL. MATERIAL ALUMINUM PLC WD31-PLCX-30101 TYPICAL DETAILS NP501 SURGE PROTECTION NO MANUAL RESET NO CONN. MOUNTING BOTTOM BOTT. HOUSING MAT. 316L STAINLESS S SEAL TYPE N/A

CONNECTON TYPE M-NPT INSTRUMENT VALVES INSTRUMENT

VALVE TREE
DIAPHRAGM/WET MAT 316L STAINLESS STEEL
Notes: STATUS TRANSMITTED TO THE PLC VIA MBTCP ON THE VFD

TAG P&ID SERVICE ASR WELL RECOVERY PRESSURE SWITCH HI HI WD34-PSHH-3610 19N02 FLUID WATER HAZARDOUS APP N/A POWER [*] WD34-PEXX36107FLUID TEMPERATURE 50 DEG F ELEM. ENCL. CLASS NEMA 4X POWER LOCATION LOOP MEASURING PRINCIPLE PRESSURE ELEMENT MATERIAL 316L SST OUTPUT RELAY SET POINT @ ~ 125 PSIG SWITCH ENCL. CLASS NEMA 4 RELAY FORM SPDT ADJUSTABLE RANGE 100-150 PSIG ENCL. MATERIAL ALUMINUM PLC WD31-PLCX-36101 TYPICAL DETAILS NP501 SURGE PROTECTION NO MANUAL RESET NO CONN. MOUNTING BOTTOM BOTT. HOUSING MAT. 316L STAINLESS S SEAL TYPE N/A

CONNECTON TYPE M-NPT INSTRUMENT VALVES INSTRUMENT

VALVE TREE
DIAPHRAGM/WET MAT 316L STAINLESS STEEL
Notes: STATUS TRANSMITTED TO THE PLC VIA MBTCP ON THE VFD 17403 11843A10_P3

Page 1 ends

Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Gauges
17404-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17404 (DraftFinal) SECTION 17404
PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT: GAUGES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Pressure/vacuum gauges.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Standards:

1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
a. B40.100 - Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures and Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Product data:

1. Accessories.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Examine the complete set of Contract Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions including:

1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc.

2. Physical conditions:
a. Installation and mounting requirements.
b. Location within the process.
c. Accessories: Verify that required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Gauges
17404-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17404 (DraftFinal)

1.06 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.07 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Notify the Engineer if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer’s recommendations or specifications.

1.08 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide instruments specified in the Contract Documents.

2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Provide instruments suitable for the installed site conditions, including, but not limited to, material compatibility, site altitude, site seismic conditions, humidity, and process and ambient temperatures.

2.03 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:

1. Ashcroft:
a. Maximum pressure less than 10 pounds per square inch: Model 1188. 1) If a stainless steel dial casing is required:
a) Model 1009.
b. Maximum pressure greater than or equal to 10 pounds per square inch:

Model1279.
1) If a stainless steel dial casing is required:
a) Model 1009. (This was selected for Westbrook and Solaire.) c. Removable Gauges:
1) Model 1082.

2. Wika.

3. Ametek U.S. Gauge.

2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. General:

1. Pressure gauge assembly shall include pressure sensing element, gauge case, and dial mechanism.

B. Performance requirements:

1. Pressure range:
a. As specified in the Contract Documents.

Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Gauges
17404-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17404 (DraftFinal)

2. Accuracy:
a. Grade 2A, as defined by ASME B40.100.
b. Within 1.0 percent of span after friction errors are eliminated by tapping or vibration.
c. Maximum allowable friction inaccuracy: Within 1.0 percent of span.

3. Element:
a. Where the maximum pressure is less than 10 pounds per square inch, provide socket and bellows; for all other pressure ranges, employ a Bourdon® tube.
b. Socket tips for bellows and Bourdon® tube:
1) Materials: Type 316 stainless steel.
c. Overpressure: Minimum 130 percent of maximum range pressure without damage to gauge or sensing element.
d. Wetted materials: Type 316 stainless steel.

4. Dial gauge:
a. Dial size: 4-1/2 inches.
b. Dial case material:
1) Maximum pressure less than 10 pounds per square inch:
a) Phenolic.
2) Maximum pressure greater than or equal to 10 pounds per square inch:
a) Stainless steel.
c. Provide safety gauge with safety blow out through the back or top of the unit.
d. Dial face: Gasketed shatterproof glass or polycarbonate. e. Provide gauge locks on all pressure gauges directly connected to diaphragm seals.
f. Provide gauge locks where possible.
g. Connection and mounting:
1) Direct mounted and suitable for outdoor installation. 2) 1/2-inch NPT.
3) Connection material: Stainless steel.
h. Pointer: Externally adjustable.

2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Pulsation dampeners and snubbers:

1. Provide pulsation dampener or snubber with each pressure gauge installed on discharge of positive displacement type pump.

2. Provide piston-type snubber if pressure spikes will exceed 130 percent of gauge maximum range.

3. Materials: Type 316 stainless steel.

4. Mount pulsation dampener or snubber integrally to the pressure gauge.

5. Connection: 1/2-inch NPT.

6. Provide diaphragm seals as specified in the Contract Documents and in Section 17401 - Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Diaphragm and Annular Seals:

7. Diaphragm seal and pressure gauge shall be assembled by manufacturer and shipped as an assembly.

Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Gauges
17404-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17404 (DraftFinal) B. Provide means for gauge isolation as specified in Section 17402 - Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Instrument Valves:

1. Mount valve manifold integrally to the gauge.

2. Valve manifold and pressure gauge shall be assembled by manufacturer and shipped as an assembly.

C. Provide stainless steel tags for each instrument. Tags shall be labeled as specified in the Contract Documents.

2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory calibrate each pressure gauge at a facility that is traceable to the NIST.

B. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of calibration instruments.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the installation location for the instrument and verify that the instrument will work properly when installed.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Coordinate the installation with trades to ensure that the mechanical system has necessary appurtenances including weld-o-lets, valves, etc., for proper installation of instruments.

3.03 COMMISSIONING
A. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Verify factory calibration of instruments in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions:

1. Return factory calibrated devices to the factory if they do not meet the field verification requirements for calibration.

3.05 SCHEDULES
A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments.

Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents:

1. Instruments may be indicated on the Drawings, specified in the Specifications, or both.

END OF SECTION
Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Gauges
17404-Attachment A 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17404 (DraftFinal) ATTACHMENT A - ISA DATASHEET - PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT: GAUGES

Pressure Gauge
SPECIFICATION 17404

PROJECT INFORMATION

PLANT CAMPUS OAKS & MISTY WOODS

ASR FACILITIES

CUSTOMER CITY OF ROSEVILLE
PROJECT 11843A10_P3 LOCATION ROSEVILLE CA

ELEMENT/SWITCH
GENERAL NOTE: FIELDS SHOWN WITH THE [*] SYMBOL ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE DATASHEET BUT MAY BE REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETE ISA DATASHEETS FOR EACH INSTRUMENT PER ALL SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS.

WD34-PIXX-30102 13N02

TAG P&ID
50 DEG F
WATER [*] 316L STAINLESS STEEL

SERVICE ASR WELL RECOVERY PRESSURE GAUGE
FLUID CONNECTION TYPE BOTT. HOUSING MAT.

TEMPERATURE ISOLATION SEALS N/A INSTRUMENT VALVES INSTRUMENT VALVE TREE MEASURING PRINCIPLE DIRECT CASE MATERIAL PHENOLIC DIAPHRAGM MAT. N/A PRESSURE RANGE: 25-125 PSI TYPICAL DETAILS [*] DIAL SIZE 4-1/2" GAUGE RANGE 0-150 PSIG OPTIONS [*] AMBIENT TEMP 80 DEG F WD34-PIXX-30105 13N01

TAG P&ID
50 DEG F
WATER 1/4 IN NPT 316L STAINLESS STEEL

SERVICE TRICKLE FLOW PRESSURE GAUGE
FLUID CONNECTION TYPE BOTT. HOUSING MAT.

TEMPERATURE ISOLATION SEALS N/A INSTRUMENT VALVES INSTRUMENT VALVE TREE MEASURING PRINCIPLE DIRECT CASE MATERIAL PHENOLIC DIAPHRAGM MAT. N/A PRESSURE RANGE: 0 - 390 'H2O TYPICAL DETAILS NP502 DIAL SIZE 4-1/2" GAUGE RANGE 0-160 PSI OPTIONS [*] AMBIENT TEMP 80 DEG F WD34-PIXX-30106 13N03

TAG P&ID
50 DEG F
WATER 1/2 IN NPT 316L STAINLESS STEEL

SERVICE STORAGE LINE PRESSURE GAUGE
FLUID CONNECTION TYPE BOTT. HOUSING MAT.

TEMPERATURE ISOLATION SEALS N/A INSTRUMENT VALVES INSTRUMENT VALVE TREE MEASURING PRINCIPLE DIRECT CASE MATERIAL PHENOLIC DIAPHRAGM MAT. N/A PRESSURE RANGE: 25-35 PSI TYPICAL DETAILS [*] DIAL SIZE 4-1/2" GAUGE RANGE 0-160 PSIG OPTIONS MOVEMENT DAMPI AMBIENT TEMP 80 DEG F WD34-PIXX-30150 13N03

TAG P&ID
50 DEG F
WATER [*] 316L STAINLESS STEEL

SERVICE RECHARGE LINE PRESSURE GAUGE
FLUID CONNECTION TYPE BOTT. HOUSING MAT.

TEMPERATURE ISOLATION SEALS N/A INSTRUMENT VALVES INSTRUMENT VALVE TREE MEASURING PRINCIPLE DIRECT CASE MATERIAL PHENOLIC DIAPHRAGM MAT. N/A PRESSURE RANGE: 25-35 PSI TYPICAL DETAILS NP501 DIAL SIZE 4-1/2" GAUGE RANGE 0-150 PSIG OPTIONS [*] AMBIENT TEMP 80 DEG F 11843A10_P3 17404

Page 1 ends

Pressure Gauge
SPECIFICATION 17404

PROJECT INFORMATION

PLANT CAMPUS OAKS & MISTY WOODS

ASR FACILITIES

CUSTOMER CITY OF ROSEVILLE
PROJECT 11843A10_P3 LOCATION ROSEVILLE CA

ELEMENT/SWITCH
GENERAL NOTE: FIELDS SHOWN WITH THE [*] SYMBOL ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE DATASHEET BUT MAY BE REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETE ISA DATASHEETS FOR EACH INSTRUMENT PER ALL SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS.

WD34-PIXX-36102 19N02

TAG P&ID
50 DEG F
WATER [*] 316L STAINLESS STEEL

SERVICE ASR WELL RECOVERY PRESSURE INDICATOR
FLUID CONNECTION TYPE BOTT. HOUSING MAT.

TEMPERATURE ISOLATION SEALS N/A INSTRUMENT VALVES INSTRUMENT VALVE TREE MEASURING PRINCIPLE DIRECT CASE MATERIAL PHENOLIC DIAPHRAGM MAT. N/A PRESSURE RANGE: 25-125 PSI TYPICAL DETAILS [*] DIAL SIZE 4-1/2" GAUGE RANGE 0-150 PSIG OPTIONS [*] AMBIENT TEMP 80 DEG F WD34-PIXX-36105 19N01

TAG P&ID
50 DEG F
WATER 1/4 IN NPT 316L STAINLESS STEEL

SERVICE TRICKLE FLOW PRESSURE GAUGE
FLUID CONNECTION TYPE BOTT. HOUSING MAT.

TEMPERATURE ISOLATION SEALS N/A INSTRUMENT VALVES INSTRUMENT VALVE TREE MEASURING PRINCIPLE DIRECT CASE MATERIAL PHENOLIC DIAPHRAGM MAT. N/A PRESSURE RANGE: 0 - 390 'H2O TYPICAL DETAILS [*] DIAL SIZE 4-1/2" GAUGE RANGE 0-160 PSI OPTIONS [*] AMBIENT TEMP 80 DEG F WD34-PIXX-36106 19N03

TAG P&ID
50 DEG F
WATER 1/2 IN NPT 316L STAINLESS STEEL

SERVICE RECHARGE LINE PRESSURE GAUGE
FLUID CONNECTION TYPE BOTT. HOUSING MAT.

TEMPERATURE ISOLATION SEALS N/A INSTRUMENT VALVES INSTRUMENT VALVE TREE MEASURING PRINCIPLE DIRECT CASE MATERIAL PHENOLIC DIAPHRAGM MAT. N/A PRESSURE RANGE: 25-35 PSI TYPICAL DETAILS [*] DIAL SIZE 4-1/2" GAUGE RANGE 0-160 PSIG OPTIONS MOVEMENT DAMPI AMBIENT TEMP 80 DEG F WD34-PIXX-36109 19N02

TAG P&ID
50 DEG F
WATER [*] 316L STAINLESS STEEL

SERVICE ASR WELL STORAGE PRESSURE INDICATOR
FLUID CONNECTION TYPE BOTT. HOUSING MAT.

TEMPERATURE ISOLATION SEALS N/A INSTRUMENT VALVES INSTRUMENT VALVE TREE MEASURING PRINCIPLE DIRECT CASE MATERIAL PHENOLIC DIAPHRAGM MAT. N/A PRESSURE RANGE: 0-35 PSI TYPICAL DETAILS [*] DIAL SIZE 4-1/2" GAUGE RANGE 0-150 PSIG OPTIONS [*] AMBIENT TEMP 80 DEG F 11843A10_P3 17404

Page 2 ends

Pressure Gauge
SPECIFICATION 17404

PROJECT INFORMATION

PLANT CAMPUS OAKS & MISTY WOODS

ASR FACILITIES

CUSTOMER CITY OF ROSEVILLE
PROJECT 11843A10_P3 LOCATION ROSEVILLE CA

ELEMENT/SWITCH
GENERAL NOTE: FIELDS SHOWN WITH THE [*] SYMBOL ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE DATASHEET BUT MAY BE REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETE ISA DATASHEETS FOR EACH INSTRUMENT PER ALL SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS.

WD34-PIXX-36150 19N03

TAG P&ID
50 DEG F
WATER [*] 316L STAINLESS STEEL

SERVICE RECHARGE LINE PRESSURE GAUGE
FLUID CONNECTION TYPE BOTT. HOUSING MAT.

TEMPERATURE ISOLATION SEALS N/A INSTRUMENT VALVES INSTRUMENT VALVE TREE MEASURING PRINCIPLE DIRECT CASE MATERIAL PHENOLIC DIAPHRAGM MAT. N/A PRESSURE RANGE: 25-35 PSI TYPICAL DETAILS [*] DIAL SIZE 4-1/2" GAUGE RANGE 0-150 PSIG OPTIONS [*] AMBIENT TEMP 80 DEG F WD37-PIXX-30001 13N04

TAG P&ID
80 DEG F
WATER [*] 316L STAINLESS STEEL

SERVICE EMERGENCY SHOWER/EYEWASH PRESSURE GAUGE
FLUID CONNECTION TYPE BOTT. HOUSING MAT.

TEMPERATURE ISOLATION SEALS N/A INSTRUMENT VALVES INSTRUMENT VALVE TREE MEASURING PRINCIPLE DIRECT CASE MATERIAL PHENOLIC DIAPHRAGM MAT. N/A PRESSURE RANGE: 0-80 PSI TYPICAL DETAILS [*] DIAL SIZE 4-1/2" GAUGE RANGE 0-150 PSIG OPTIONS [*] AMBIENT TEMP 80 DEG F WD37-PIXX-30002 13N07

TAG P&ID
95 DEG F
WATER [*] [*]

SERVICE RESTROOM HOT WATER PRESSURE GAUGE
FLUID CONNECTION TYPE BOTT. HOUSING MAT.

TEMPERATURE ISOLATION SEALS N/A INSTRUMENT VALVES [*]
MEASURING PRINCIPLE DIRECT CASE MATERIAL [*] DIAPHRAGM MAT. N/A PRESSURE RANGE: 0-30 PSIG TYPICAL DETAILS NP502 DIAL SIZE [*] GAUGE RANGE 0-60 PSI OPTIONS [*] AMBIENT TEMP 80 DEG F
Notes: CHOOSE HOUSING AND CASE MATERIAL, FITTING SIZE AND DIAL SIZE AS APPROPRIATE FOR THE APPLICATION.

WD37-PIXX-36001 19N04

TAG P&ID
80 DEG F
WATER [*] 316L STAINLESS STEEL

SERVICE EMERGENCY SHOWER/EYEWASH PRESSURE GAUGE
FLUID CONNECTION TYPE BOTT. HOUSING MAT.

TEMPERATURE ISOLATION SEALS N/A INSTRUMENT VALVES INSTRUMENT VALVE TREE MEASURING PRINCIPLE DIRECT CASE MATERIAL PHENOLIC DIAPHRAGM MAT. N/A PRESSURE RANGE: 0-80 PSI TYPICAL DETAILS [*] DIAL SIZE 4-1/2" GAUGE RANGE 0-150 PSIG OPTIONS [*] AMBIENT TEMP 80 DEG F 11843A10_P3 17404

Page 3 ends

Pressure Gauge
SPECIFICATION 17404

PROJECT INFORMATION

PLANT CAMPUS OAKS & MISTY WOODS

ASR FACILITIES

CUSTOMER CITY OF ROSEVILLE
PROJECT 11843A10_P3 LOCATION ROSEVILLE CA

ELEMENT/SWITCH
GENERAL NOTE: FIELDS SHOWN WITH THE [*] SYMBOL ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE DATASHEET BUT MAY BE REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETE ISA DATASHEETS FOR EACH INSTRUMENT PER ALL SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS.

WD37-PIXX-36002 19N07

TAG P&ID
95 DEG F
WATER [*] [*]

SERVICE RESTROOM HOT WATER PRESSURE GAUGE
FLUID CONNECTION TYPE BOTT. HOUSING MAT.

TEMPERATURE ISOLATION SEALS N/A INSTRUMENT VALVES [*]
MEASURING PRINCIPLE DIRECT CASE MATERIAL [*] DIAPHRAGM MAT. N/A PRESSURE RANGE: 0-30 PSIG TYPICAL DETAILS NP502 DIAL SIZE [*] GAUGE RANGE 0-60 PSI OPTIONS [*] AMBIENT TEMP 80 DEG F
Notes: CHOOSE HOUSING AND CASE MATERIAL, FITTING SIZE AND DIAL SIZE AS APPROPRIATE FOR THE APPLICATION. 11843A10_P3 17404

Page 4 ends

Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Direct
17405-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17405 (DraftFinal) SECTION 17405
PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT: DIRECT
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Pressure transmitters and indicators.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.03 TERMINOLOGY
A. The words and terms listed below are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in this Section, have the indicated meaning.

1. Calibrated range: Range that the pressure transmitter is configured to measure. a. Low end of the calibrated range must be greater than the lower range value (LRV) of the transmitter.
b. High end of the calibrated range must be less than or equal to the upper range value (URV).
c. Calibrated range corresponds to the flow signal sent from the transmitter.

2. Lower range value (LRV): Lowest pressure that the pressure transmitter is capable of measuring.

3. Upper range value (URV): Highest pressure that the pressure transmitter is capable of measuring.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures and Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of calibration instruments.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Examine the complete set of Contract Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions, including:

1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc.

2. Physical conditions:
a. Installation and mounting requirements.

Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Direct
17405-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17405 (DraftFinal) b. Location within the process.
c. Accessories: Verify that required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation.

C. Provide instruments manufactured at facilities certified to the quality standards of ISO 9001.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.08 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Notify the Engineer if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer’s recommendations or specifications.

1.09 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

1.10 MAINTENANCE
A. Furnish parts, materials, fluids, etc., necessary for operation, maintenance, and calibration purposes throughout the warranty period. Deliver these supplies before Project Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide instruments identified in the Contract Documents.

2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Provide instruments suitable for the installed Site conditions, including, but not limited to, material compatibility, Site altitude, Site seismic conditions, humidity, and process and ambient temperatures.

2.03 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:

1. ABB, 266 Series.

2. Emerson, Rosemount 2051 Series with high performance option.

3. Emerson, Rosemount 3051 Series.

Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Direct
17405-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17405 (DraftFinal)

4. Endress & Hauser, Cerabar S Series.

5. Yokogawa, EJA Series.

2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Pressure transmitters - direct:

1. General:
a. Pressure transmitter assembly shall include a diaphragm type pressure transducer and microprocessor-based transmitter for measurement of gauge, vacuum, or absolute pressure.

2. Performance requirements:
a. Maximum ratio of total instrument range to calibrated span: 10 to 1. b. Accuracy:
1) Reference accuracy: Within 0.075 percent of calibrated span, including effects of hysteresis, nonlinearity, and repeatability. 2) Total performance accuracy: Within 0.30 percent of calibrated span, including reference accuracy effects, static pressure and ambient temperature effects.
3) Stability: Within 0.15 percent of upper range limit over 5 years.

3. Element:
a. Diaphragm type transducer integral to pressure transmitter. b. Diaphragm material: Stainless steel or ceramic.
c. Process material compatibility:
1) Verify material compatibilities with the instrument manufacturer. d. Process connection: As specified in Attachment A - ISA Datasheet - Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Direct.

4. Transmitter:
a. Power supply:
1) As indicated in the datasheets.
b. Outputs:
1) As indicated in the datasheets.
c. Provided with electronic microprocessor.
d. Adjustments: Adjustable electronic zero and span, with elevated or suppressed zero as required by application. Adjustment shall be possible without mechanical fulcrum points or handheld configurator. e. Local display:
1) 5-digit LCD.
2) Scaled in engineering units.
f. Enclosure:
1) As indicated in the datasheets.
g. Over range protection: To maximum process line pressure. h. Conduit: 1/2-inch male NPT.

5. Components:
a. Transmitter mounting:
1) As indicated in the datasheets.
2) Provide necessary hardware for transmitter mounting.

Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Direct
17405-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17405 (DraftFinal)

2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Furnish instrument isolation as indicated in the datasheets and specified in Section 17402 - Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Instrument Valves:

1. Mount isolation device integrally to the instrument.

2. Isolation device and instrument shall be assembled by the manufacturer and shipped as an assembly.

B. Provide remote or integral diaphragm seals as indicated on the Drawings or as indicated in the datasheets.

C. Provide sunshades for outdoor installations.

D. Provide stainless steel tags for each instrument. Tags shall be labeled as specified in the Contract Documents.

2.06 FINISHES (NOT USED)

2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory calibrate each instrument with a minimum 3-point calibration or according to the manufacturer’s standard at a facility that is traceable to the NIST.

1. Submit calibration datasheets to the Engineer at least 30 days before shipment of the instruments to the Project Site.

B. FM approval certification or equal when installed in classified areas.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the installation location for the instrument and verify that the instrument will work properly when installed.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Coordinate the installation with trades to ensure that the mechanical system has necessary appurtenances, including weld-o-lets, valves, etc., for proper installation of instruments.

3.03 CALIBRATION AND TESTING
A. As specified in Section 17950 - Commissioning for Instrumentation and Controls.

Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Direct
17405-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17405 (DraftFinal)

3.04 SCHEDULES
A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments.

Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents:

1. Instruments may be indicated on the Drawings, specified in the Specifications, or both.

END OF SECTION

Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Direct
17405-Attachment A 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17405 (DraftFinal) ATTACHMENT A - ISA DATASHEET - PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT: DIRECT

Pressure Transmitter

PROJECT INFORMATION

PLANT CAMPUS OAKS & MISTY WOODS

ASR FACILITIES

CUSTOMER CITY OF ROSEVILLE
PROJECT 11843A10_P3 LOCATION ROSEVILLE CA
GENERAL NOTE: FIELDS SHOWN WITH THE [*] SYMBOL ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE DATASHEET BUT MAY BE REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETE ISA DATASHEETS FOR EACH INSTRUMENT PER ALL SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS.

GENERAL
TAG WD34-PITX-30102 (WD34-PEXX30102)
SPECIFICATION NUMBER 17405 MEASURING PRINCIPLE DIRECT
DRAWING NUMBER 13N02 PLC WD31-PLCX-30101

SERVICE ASR WELL RECOVERY PRESSURE

ELEMENT
TYPICAL DETAILS NP501

CONNECTION

CONNECTION TYPE M-NPT INSTRUMENT VALVES INSTRUMENT VALVE TREE FLUID
FLUID WATER PRESSURE RANGE 0-160 PSIG
TEMPERATURE 50 DEG F

ELEMENT
ELEMENT TAG NO. WD34-PEXX-30102 SEAL TYPE N/A
ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4 DIAPHRAGM MATERIAL 316L STAINLESS STEEL HAZARDOUS APPROVALS N/A BOTTOM HOUSING MAT. 316L STAINLESS STEEL

TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER TAG NO. WD34-PITX-30102 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 80 DEG F MOUNTING INT OUTPUT 4-20 MA
ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4X SURGE PROTECTION NO
NOTES
[*]
11843A10_P3 17405

Page 1 ends

Pressure Transmitter

PROJECT INFORMATION

PLANT CAMPUS OAKS & MISTY WOODS

ASR FACILITIES

CUSTOMER CITY OF ROSEVILLE
PROJECT 11843A10_P3 LOCATION ROSEVILLE CA
GENERAL NOTE: FIELDS SHOWN WITH THE [*] SYMBOL ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE DATASHEET BUT MAY BE REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETE ISA DATASHEETS FOR EACH INSTRUMENT PER ALL SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS.

GENERAL
TAG WD34-PITX-30106 (WD34-PEXX30106)
SPECIFICATION NUMBER 17405 MEASURING PRINCIPLE DIRECT
DRAWING NUMBER 13N03 PLC WD31-PLCX-30101

SERVICE STORAGE LINE PRESSURE

ELEMENT
TYPICAL DETAILS NP501

CONNECTION

CONNECTION TYPE M-NPT INSTRUMENT VALVES INSTRUMENT VALVE TREE FLUID
FLUID WATER PRESSURE RANGE 0-150 PSIG
TEMPERATURE 50 DEG F

ELEMENT
ELEMENT TAG NO. WD34-PEXX-30106 SEAL TYPE N/A
ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4 DIAPHRAGM MATERIAL 316L STAINLESS STEEL HAZARDOUS APPROVALS N/A BOTTOM HOUSING MAT. 316L STAINLESS STEEL

TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER TAG NO. WD34-PITX-30106 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 80 DEG F MOUNTING INT OUTPUT 4-20 MA
ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4X SURGE PROTECTION NO
NOTES
[*]
11843A10_P3 17405

Page 2 ends

Pressure Transmitter

PROJECT INFORMATION

PLANT CAMPUS OAKS & MISTY WOODS

ASR FACILITIES

CUSTOMER CITY OF ROSEVILLE
PROJECT 11843A10_P3 LOCATION ROSEVILLE CA
GENERAL NOTE: FIELDS SHOWN WITH THE [*] SYMBOL ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE DATASHEET BUT MAY BE REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETE ISA DATASHEETS FOR EACH INSTRUMENT PER ALL SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS.

GENERAL
TAG WD34-PITX-30109 (WD34-PEXX30109)
SPECIFICATION NUMBER 17405 MEASURING PRINCIPLE DIRECT
DRAWING NUMBER 13N02 PLC WD31-PLCX-30101

SERVICE ASR WELL STORAGE PRESSURE

ELEMENT
TYPICAL DETAILS NP501

CONNECTION

CONNECTION TYPE M-NPT INSTRUMENT VALVES INSTRUMENT VALVE TREE FLUID
FLUID WATER PRESSURE RANGE 0-150 PSIG
TEMPERATURE 50 DEG F

ELEMENT
ELEMENT TAG NO. WD34-PEXX-30109 SEAL TYPE N/A
ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4 DIAPHRAGM MATERIAL 316L STAINLESS STEEL HAZARDOUS APPROVALS N/A BOTTOM HOUSING MAT. 316L STAINLESS STEEL

TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER TAG NO. WD34-PITX-30109 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 80 DEG F MOUNTING INT OUTPUT 4-20 MA
ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4X SURGE PROTECTION NO
NOTES
[*]
11843A10_P3 17405

Page 3 ends

Pressure Transmitter

PROJECT INFORMATION

PLANT CAMPUS OAKS & MISTY WOODS

ASR FACILITIES

CUSTOMER CITY OF ROSEVILLE
PROJECT 11843A10_P3 LOCATION ROSEVILLE CA
GENERAL NOTE: FIELDS SHOWN WITH THE [*] SYMBOL ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE DATASHEET BUT MAY BE REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETE ISA DATASHEETS FOR EACH INSTRUMENT PER ALL SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS.

GENERAL
TAG WD34-PITX-36102 (WD34-PEXX36102)
SPECIFICATION NUMBER 17405 MEASURING PRINCIPLE DIRECT
DRAWING NUMBER 19N02 PLC WD31-PLCX-36101

SERVICE ASR WELL RECOVERY PRESSURE

ELEMENT
TYPICAL DETAILS NP501

CONNECTION

CONNECTION TYPE M-NPT INSTRUMENT VALVES INSTRUMENT VALVE TREE FLUID
FLUID WATER PRESSURE RANGE 0-150 PSIG
TEMPERATURE 50 DEG F

ELEMENT
ELEMENT TAG NO. WD34-PEXX-36102 SEAL TYPE N/A
ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4 DIAPHRAGM MATERIAL 316L STAINLESS STEEL HAZARDOUS APPROVALS N/A BOTTOM HOUSING MAT. 316L STAINLESS STEEL

TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER TAG NO. WD34-PITX-36102 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 80 DEG F MOUNTING INT OUTPUT 4-20 MA
ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4X SURGE PROTECTION NO
NOTES
[*]
11843A10_P3 17405

Page 4 ends

Pressure Transmitter

PROJECT INFORMATION

PLANT CAMPUS OAKS & MISTY WOODS

ASR FACILITIES

CUSTOMER CITY OF ROSEVILLE
PROJECT 11843A10_P3 LOCATION ROSEVILLE CA
GENERAL NOTE: FIELDS SHOWN WITH THE [*] SYMBOL ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE DATASHEET BUT MAY BE REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETE ISA DATASHEETS FOR EACH INSTRUMENT PER ALL SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS.

GENERAL
TAG WD34-PITX-36106 (WD34-PEXX36106)
SPECIFICATION NUMBER 17405 MEASURING PRINCIPLE DIRECT
DRAWING NUMBER 19N03 PLC WD31-PLCX-36101

SERVICE STORAGE LINE PRESSURE

ELEMENT
TYPICAL DETAILS NP501

CONNECTION

CONNECTION TYPE M-NPT INSTRUMENT VALVES INSTRUMENT VALVE TREE FLUID
FLUID WATER PRESSURE RANGE 0-150 PSIG
TEMPERATURE 50 DEG F

ELEMENT
ELEMENT TAG NO. WD34-PEXX-36106 SEAL TYPE N/A
ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4 DIAPHRAGM MATERIAL 316L STAINLESS STEEL HAZARDOUS APPROVALS N/A BOTTOM HOUSING MAT. 316L STAINLESS STEEL

TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER TAG NO. WD34-PITX-36106 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 80 DEG F MOUNTING INT OUTPUT 4-20 MA
ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4X SURGE PROTECTION NO
NOTES
[*]
11843A10_P3 17405

Page 5 ends

Pressure Transmitter

PROJECT INFORMATION

PLANT CAMPUS OAKS & MISTY WOODS

ASR FACILITIES

CUSTOMER CITY OF ROSEVILLE
PROJECT 11843A10_P3 LOCATION ROSEVILLE CA
GENERAL NOTE: FIELDS SHOWN WITH THE [*] SYMBOL ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE DATASHEET BUT MAY BE REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETE ISA DATASHEETS FOR EACH INSTRUMENT PER ALL SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS.

GENERAL
TAG WD34-PITX-36109 (WD34-PEXX36109)
SPECIFICATION NUMBER 17405 MEASURING PRINCIPLE DIRECT
DRAWING NUMBER 19N02 PLC WD31-PLCX-36101

SERVICE ASR WELL STORAGE PRESSURE

ELEMENT
TYPICAL DETAILS NP501

CONNECTION

CONNECTION TYPE M-NPT INSTRUMENT VALVES INSTRUMENT VALVE TREE FLUID
FLUID WATER PRESSURE RANGE 0-150 PSIG
TEMPERATURE 50 DEG F

ELEMENT
ELEMENT TAG NO. WD34-PEXX-36109 SEAL TYPE N/A
ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4 DIAPHRAGM MATERIAL 316L STAINLESS STEEL HAZARDOUS APPROVALS N/A BOTTOM HOUSING MAT. 316L STAINLESS STEEL

TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER TAG NO. WD34-PITX-36109 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 80 DEG F MOUNTING INT OUTPUT 4-20 MA
ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4X SURGE PROTECTION NO
NOTES
[*]
11843A10_P3 17405

Page 6 ends

Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Differential
17406-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17406 (DraftFinal) SECTION 17406
PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT: DIFFERENTIAL
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Differential pressure transmitters and indicators.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.03 TERMINOLOGY
A. The words and terms listed below are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in this Section, have the indicated meaning.

1. Calibrated range: Range that the pressure transmitter is configured to measure. a. Low end of the calibrated range must be greater than the lower range value (LRV) of the transmitter.
b. High end of the calibrated range must be less than the upper range value (URV).
c. Calibrated range corresponds to the pressure signal sent from the transmitter.
d. When a Low-Flow Cut-Off is considered, the calibration set points need to be 10 percent, 25 percent, 50 percent, 75 percent, and 100 percent of the output flowrate rather than starting form 0 percent.

2. Lower range value (LRV): Lowest pressure that the pressure transmitter is capable of measuring.

3. Upper range value (URV): Highest pressure that the pressure transmitter is capable of measuring.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures and Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Product data:

1. Accessories.

C. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of calibration instruments.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Differential
17406-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17406 (DraftFinal) B. Examine the complete set of Contract Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions, including:

1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc.

2. Physical conditions:
a. Installation and mounting requirements.
b. Location within the process.
c. Accessories: Verify that required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.08 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Notify the Engineer if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer’s recommendations or specifications.

1.09 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

1.10 MAINTENANCE
A. Furnish parts, materials, fluids, etc., necessary for operation, maintenance, and calibration purposes throughout the warranty period. Deliver these supplies before Project Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide instruments specified in the Contract Documents.

2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Provide instruments suitable for the installed Site conditions, including, but not limited to, material compatibility, Site altitude, Site seismic conditions, humidity, and process and ambient temperatures.

2.03 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following, no equal:

1. Emerson, Rosemount 3051S Series.

Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Differential
17406-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17406 (DraftFinal)

2. Endress + Hauser, Deltabar S Series.

3. SMAR, LD300 Series.

2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. As specified in this Section, including Attachment A - ISA Datasheet - Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Differential.

B. Pressure transmitters - differential:

1. General:
a. Differential pressure transmitter assembly shall include a diaphragm-type pressure transducer and microprocessor-based transmitter for measurement of differential pressure.
b. Differential pressure transmitters shall be used for differential pressure, flow, or liquid level measurement as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Performance requirements:
a. Maximum ratio of total instrument range to calibrated span: 10 to 1. b. Accuracy:
1) Reference accuracy: Within 0.075 percent of calibrated span, including effects of hysteresis, nonlinearity, and repeatability. 2) Stability: Within 0.30 percent of upper range limit over 5 years.

3. Element:
a. Diaphragm-type transducer integral to differential pressure transmitter. b. Diaphragm/wetted material: As indicated in Attachment A - ISA Datasheet - Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Differential.
c. Wetted materials: As indicated in the datasheets.
d. Process material compatibility:
1) Verify material compatibilities with the instrument manufacturer. e. Diaphragm fill fluid: [Silicon oil][Inert halocarbon]. f. Process connection: As indicated in the datasheets.

4. Transmitter:
a. Power supply:
1) As indicated in the datasheets.
b. Outputs:
1) As indicated in the datasheets.
c. Provided with electronic microprocessor.
d. Adjustments: Adjustable electronic zero and span, with elevated or suppressed zero as required by application. Adjustment shall be possible without mechanical fulcrum points or handheld configurator. e. Square root extraction for flow calculation.
f. Local display:
1) 5-digit LCD.
2) Scaled in engineering units.
g. Enclosure:
1) As indicated in the datasheets.
h. Overrange protection: To maximum process line pressure. i. Conduit connection: 1/2-inch male NPT.

5. Components:
a. Transmitter mounting:
1) As indicated in the datasheets.
2) Provide necessary hardware for transmitter mounting.

Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Differential
17406-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17406 (DraftFinal)

2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide seals as indicated on the Drawings and as indicated in the datasheets.

1. Diaphragm seals and instrument shall be assembled by the manufacturer and shipped as an assembly.

B. Furnish device isolation as indicated in the datasheets and specified in Section 17402 - Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Instrument Valves:

1. Mount isolation device integrally to the instrument.

2. Isolation device and instrument shall be assembled by the manufacturer and shipped as an assembly.

C. Provide flanged diaphragm for tank or vessel level measurement:

1. Flanged diaphragm and transmitter shall be assembled by the manufacturer and shipped as an assembly.

D. Provide sunshades for outdoor installations.

E. Provide stainless steel tags for each instrument. Tags shall be labeled as specified in the Contract Documents.

F. Sensing (impulse) lines:

1. Provide sensing lines for each instrument.

2. Seamless stainless steel.

3. Pressure rated for the actual field service conditions.

4. Diameter based on the overall length.
a. Up to 10 feet: 3/8-inch.
b. From 10 feet to 20 feet: 1/2-inch.
c. From 20 feet to 40 feet: 1-inch.
d. Increase the diameter 1 increment for medium to heavy viscosity fluids, very dirty fluids and sludges.

2.06 FINISHES (NOT USED)

2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Each differential pressure transmitter shall be factory calibrated with 5-point calibration at a facility that is traceable to the NIST.

B. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of calibration instruments.

C. FM approval certification or equal when installed in classified areas.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the installation location for the instrument and verify that the instrument will work properly when installed.

Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Differential
17406-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17406 (DraftFinal)

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Coordinate the installation with trades to ensure that the mechanical system has necessary appurtenances, including weld-o-lets, valves, etc., for proper installation of instruments.

C. Install sensing lines in accordance with the Contract Documents and the line manufacturer.

3.03 CALIBRATION AND TESTING
A. As specified in Section 17950 - Commissioning for Instrumentation and Controls.

3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Verify factory calibration of instruments in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions:

1. Return factory calibrated devices to the factory if they do not meet the field verification requirements for calibration.

3.05 SCHEDULES
A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments.

Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents:

1. Instruments may be indicated on the Drawings, specified in the Specifications, or both.

END OF SECTION

Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Differential
17406-Attachment A 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17406 (DraftFinal) ATTACHMENT A - ISA DATASHEET - PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT:

DIFFERENTIAL

Pressure Transmitter

PROJECT INFORMATION

PLANT CAMPUS OAKS & MISTY WOODS

ASR FACILITIES

CUSTOMER CITY OF ROSEVILLE
PROJECT 11843A10_P3 LOCATION ROSEVILLE CA
GENERAL NOTE: FIELDS SHOWN WITH THE [*] SYMBOL ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE DATASHEET BUT MAY BE REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETE ISA DATASHEETS FOR EACH INSTRUMENT PER ALL SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS.

GENERAL
TAG WD34-PDIT-30151 (WD34-PEXX30151)
SPECIFICATION NUMBER 17406 MEASURING PRINCIPLE DIFFERENTIAL DRAWING NUMBER 13N03 PLC WD31-PLCX-30101

SERVICE H-STRAINER DIFFERENTIAL

PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
TYPICAL DETAILS NP189

CONNECTION
CONNECTION TYPE 1/2" M-NPT INSTRUMENT VALVES METERING 5-VALVE MANIFOLD FLUID
FLUID WATER PRESSURE RANGE 0-5 PSI
TEMPERATURE 50 DEG F

ELEMENT
ELEMENT TAG NO. WD34-PEXX-30151 SEAL TYPE N/A
ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4 DIAPHRAGM MATERIAL 316L STAINLESS STEEL HAZARDOUS APPROVALS N/A BOTTOM HOUSING MAT. 316L STAINLESS STEEL

TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER TAG NO. WD34-PDIT-30151 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 80 DEG F MOUNTING INT OUTPUT 4-20 MA HART
ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4 SURGE PROTECTION NO
NOTES
[*]
11843A10_P3 17406

Page 1 ends

Pressure Transmitter

PROJECT INFORMATION

PLANT CAMPUS OAKS & MISTY WOODS

ASR FACILITIES

CUSTOMER CITY OF ROSEVILLE
PROJECT 11843A10_P3 LOCATION ROSEVILLE CA
GENERAL NOTE: FIELDS SHOWN WITH THE [*] SYMBOL ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE DATASHEET BUT MAY BE REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETE ISA DATASHEETS FOR EACH INSTRUMENT PER ALL SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS.

GENERAL
TAG WD34-PDIT-36151 (WD34-PEXX36151)
SPECIFICATION NUMBER 17406 MEASURING PRINCIPLE DIFFERENTIAL DRAWING NUMBER 19N03 PLC WD31-PLCX-36101

SERVICE H-STRAINER DIFFERENTIAL

PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
TYPICAL DETAILS NP189

CONNECTION
CONNECTION TYPE 1/2" M-NPT INSTRUMENT VALVES METERING 5-VALVE MANIFOLD FLUID
FLUID WATER PRESSURE RANGE 0-5 PSI
TEMPERATURE 50 DEG F

ELEMENT
ELEMENT TAG NO. WD34-PEXX-36151 SEAL TYPE N/A
ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4 DIAPHRAGM MATERIAL 316L STAINLESS STEEL HAZARDOUS APPROVALS N/A BOTTOM HOUSING MAT. 316L STAINLESS STEEL

TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER TAG NO. WD34-PDIT-36151 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 80 DEG F MOUNTING INT OUTPUT 4-20 MA HART
ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4 SURGE PROTECTION NO
NOTES
[*]
11843A10_P3 17406

Page 2 ends

Pressure Measurement: Submersible
17407-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17407 (DraftFinal) SECTION 17407
PRESSURE MEASUREMENT: SUBMERSIBLE
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Submersible pressure transmitters.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures, and Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of calibration instruments.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Examine the complete set of Contract Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions, including:

1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc.

2. Physical conditions:
a. Installation and mounting requirements.
b. Location within the process.
c. Accessories: Verify that required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation.

C. Provide instruments manufactured at facilities certified to the quality standards of ISO 9001.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.06 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. Project environmental conditions as specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

Pressure Measurement: Submersible
17407-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17407 (DraftFinal)

1.07 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Notify the Engineer if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer’s recommendations or specifications.

1.08 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

1.09 MAINTENANCE
A. Furnish parts, materials, fluids, etc., necessary for operation, maintenance, and calibration purposes throughout the warranty period. Deliver these supplies before Project Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide instruments identified in the Contract Documents.

2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Provide instruments suitable for the installed Site conditions, including, but not limited to, material compatibility, Site altitude, Site seismic conditions, humidity, and process and ambient temperatures.

2.03 MANUFACTURERS
A. Submersible level measurement with 2-wire integral transmitter:

1. One of the following or equal:
a. Endress+Hauser, Waterpilot FMX21. (This was selected for Westbrook and Solaire.)
b. Druck, PTX-1830.
c. Siemens, SITRANS LH100.
d. Measurement Specialties, KPSI 700 Series.

2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. As specified in this Section, including Attachment A - ISA Datasheet - Pressure Measurement: Submersible.

B. Submersible level measurement with 2-wire integral transmitter:

1. General:
a. Pressure is measured through a diaphragm-type measuring cell and converted to linear pressure measurement.
b. Each submersible pressure transmitter system shall include:
1) Signal cable, including pressure compensation tube.
2) Transducer probe with integral transmitter.
3) Transmitter cable termination box.

Pressure Measurement: Submersible
17407-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17407 (DraftFinal)

2. Performance requirements:
a. Accuracy:
1) 0.3 percent of range.
b. Repeatability:
1) 0.25 percent of full scale.
c. Rangeability:
1) 3:1.
d. Range:
1) As indicated on the contract documents.

3. Element:
a. Sensor housing shall be Type 316L stainless steel or titanium with ceramic, Teflon™-coated, or titanium diaphragm.
b. Protective cap shall be manufacturer’s recommended material, chemically resistant to process fluid.
1) Slip resistant extension cable with pressure compensation tube with Teflon™ filter.
c. Enclosure for probe and transmitter assembly shall be NEMA Type 6P.

4. Transmitter:
a. Power supply:
1) 24 VDC: 2wire loop powered.
2) Power consumption: 18 VA maximum.
b. Outputs:
1) Isolated 4 to 20 milliamperes DC.
c. Without display.
d. Ambient operating temperature limits of -10 to 70 degrees Celsius (-14 to 158 degrees Fahrenheit).
e. Transmitter shall be integral to probe housing.

5. Transmitter cable termination box:
a. NEMA Type 4X.
b. Equipped with filter or desiccant chamber to eliminate moisture from the pressure compensation tube.
c. Termination for signal wires and pressure compensation tube.

2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Type 316L stainless steel mounting clamp with Type 304 stainless steel mounting screws.

B. Provide cable clamp and strain relief.

C. Provide remote display with backlight or loop indicator with backlight as indicated on the Drawings and as specified in Section 17710 - Control Systems: Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components.

D. Provide sunshade for outdoor installations.

Pressure Measurement: Submersible
17407-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17407 (DraftFinal)

2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory calibrate each instrument with a minimum 3-point calibration or according to the manufacturer’s standard at a facility that is traceable to the NIST.

1. Submit calibration datasheet to the Engineer at least 30 days before shipment of the instruments to the Project Site.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the installation location for the instrument and verify that the instrument will work properly when installed.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Coordinate the installation with trades to ensure that the mechanical system has necessary appurtenances, including weld-o-lets, valves, etc., for proper installation of instruments.

3.03 COMMISSIONING
A. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

3.04 SCHEDULES
A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments.

Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents:

1. Instruments may be indicated on the Drawings, specified in the Specifications, or both.

END OF SECTION
Pressure Measurement: Submersible
17407-Attachment A 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17407 (DraftFinal) ATTACHMENT A - ISA DATASHEET - PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT:

SUBMERSIBLE

Submersible Pressure
Transmitter

PROJECT INFORMATION

PLANT CAMPUS OAKS & MISTY WOODS

ASR FACILITIES

CUSTOMER CITY OF ROSEVILLE
PROJECT 11843A10_P3 LOCATION ROSEVILLE CA
GENERAL NOTE: FIELDS SHOWN WITH THE [*] SYMBOL ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE DATASHEET BUT MAY BE REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETE ISA DATASHEETS FOR EACH INSTRUMENT PER ALL SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS.

GENERAL
TAG WD33-LITX-30401 (WD33-LEXX30401)
SPECIFICATION NUMBER 17407 MEASURING PRINCIPLE DIRECT
DRAWING NUMBER 13N06 PLC WD31-PLCX-30101
SERVICE COMW-C WELL WATER LEVEL TYPICAL DETAILS [*]

CONNECTION
CONNECTION TYPE [*] INSTRUMENT VALVES N/A

ISOLATION SEALS N/A
FLUID
FLUID WATER INSTRUMENT RANGE 0-500FT
TEMPERATURE 50 DEG F

ELEMENT
ELEMENT TAG NO. WD33-LEXX-30401 HOUSING MATERIAL 316L SST ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4X MEMBRANE MATERIAL FKM
HAZARDOUS APPROVALS N/A DIAPHRAGM MATERIAL MFR. STD.

TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER TAG NO.

ENCLOSURE CLASS
WD33-LITX-30401
NEMA 4X

SIGNAL OUTPUT AI
OUTPUT [*]
TRANS. MOUNTING INT AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 80 DEG F

SURGE PROTECTION YES
NOTES
E&H FMX21-AA221PGE##A+POPSPWZ1 WAS ORDERED FOR WESTBROOK AND SOLAIRE 11843A10_P3 17407

Page 1 ends

Submersible Pressure
Transmitter

PROJECT INFORMATION

PLANT CAMPUS OAKS & MISTY WOODS

ASR FACILITIES

CUSTOMER CITY OF ROSEVILLE
PROJECT 11843A10_P3 LOCATION ROSEVILLE CA
GENERAL NOTE: FIELDS SHOWN WITH THE [*] SYMBOL ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE DATASHEET BUT MAY BE REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETE ISA DATASHEETS FOR EACH INSTRUMENT PER ALL SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS.

GENERAL
TAG WD33-LITX-36401 (WD33-LEXX36401)
SPECIFICATION NUMBER 17407 MEASURING PRINCIPLE DIRECT
DRAWING NUMBER 19N06 PLC WD31-PLCX-36101
SERVICE COMW-C WELL WATER LEVEL TYPICAL DETAILS [*]

CONNECTION
CONNECTION TYPE [*] INSTRUMENT VALVES N/A

ISOLATION SEALS N/A
FLUID
FLUID WATER INSTRUMENT RANGE 0-500FT
TEMPERATURE 50 DEG F

ELEMENT
ELEMENT TAG NO. WD33-LEXX-36401 HOUSING MATERIAL 316L SST ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4X MEMBRANE MATERIAL FKM
HAZARDOUS APPROVALS N/A DIAPHRAGM MATERIAL MFR. STD.

TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER TAG NO.

ENCLOSURE CLASS
WD33-LITX-36401
NEMA 4X

SIGNAL OUTPUT AI
OUTPUT [*]
TRANS. MOUNTING INT AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 80 DEG F

SURGE PROTECTION YES
NOTES
E&H FMX21-AA221PGE##A+POPSPWZ1 WAS ORDERED FOR WESTBROOK AND SOLAIRE 11843A10_P3 17407

Page 2 ends

Submersible Pressure
Transmitter

PROJECT INFORMATION

PLANT CAMPUS OAKS & MISTY WOODS

ASR FACILITIES

CUSTOMER CITY OF ROSEVILLE
PROJECT 11843A10_P3 LOCATION ROSEVILLE CA
GENERAL NOTE: FIELDS SHOWN WITH THE [*] SYMBOL ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE DATASHEET BUT MAY BE REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETE ISA DATASHEETS FOR EACH INSTRUMENT PER ALL SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS.

GENERAL
TAG WD34-LITX-30100 (WD34-LEXX30100)
SPECIFICATION NUMBER 17407 MEASURING PRINCIPLE DIRECT
DRAWING NUMBER 13N02 PLC WD31-PLCX-36101
SERVICE ASR WELL LEVEL TRANSDUCER TYPICAL DETAILS [*]

CONNECTION
CONNECTION TYPE FLANGED INSTRUMENT VALVES [*]

ISOLATION SEALS N/A
FLUID
FLUID [*] INSTRUMENT RANGE ___-___FT
TEMPERATURE [*]

ELEMENT
ELEMENT TAG NO. WD34-LEXX-30100 HOUSING MATERIAL MFR. STD.

ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4X MEMBRANE MATERIAL MFR. STD.

HAZARDOUS APPROVALS N/A DIAPHRAGM MATERIAL MFR. STD.

TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER TAG NO.

ENCLOSURE CLASS
WD34-LITX-30100
NEMA 4X

SIGNAL OUTPUT AI
OUTPUT [*]
TRANS. MOUNTING INT AMBIENT TEMPERATURE [*]

SURGE PROTECTION NO
NOTES
[*]
11843A10_P3 17407

Page 3 ends

Submersible Pressure
Transmitter

PROJECT INFORMATION

PLANT CAMPUS OAKS & MISTY WOODS

ASR FACILITIES

CUSTOMER CITY OF ROSEVILLE
PROJECT 11843A10_P3 LOCATION ROSEVILLE CA
GENERAL NOTE: FIELDS SHOWN WITH THE [*] SYMBOL ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE DATASHEET BUT MAY BE REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETE ISA DATASHEETS FOR EACH INSTRUMENT PER ALL SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS.

GENERAL
TAG WD34-LITX-36100 (WD34-LEXX36100)
SPECIFICATION NUMBER 17407 MEASURING PRINCIPLE DIRECT
DRAWING NUMBER 19N02 PLC WD31-PLCX-36101
SERVICE ASR WELL LEVEL TRANSDUCER TYPICAL DETAILS [*]

CONNECTION
CONNECTION TYPE FLANGED INSTRUMENT VALVES [*]

ISOLATION SEALS N/A
FLUID
FLUID [*] INSTRUMENT RANGE ___-___FT
TEMPERATURE [*]

ELEMENT
ELEMENT TAG NO. WD34-LEXX-36100 HOUSING MATERIAL MFR. STD.

ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4X MEMBRANE MATERIAL MFR. STD.

HAZARDOUS APPROVALS N/A DIAPHRAGM MATERIAL MFR. STD.

TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER TAG NO.

ENCLOSURE CLASS
WD34-LITX-36100
NEMA 4X

SIGNAL OUTPUT AI
OUTPUT [*]
TRANS. MOUNTING INT AMBIENT TEMPERATURE [*]

SURGE PROTECTION NO
NOTES
[*]
11843A10_P3 17407

Page 4 ends

Analyzers: Residual Chlorine
17505-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17505 (DraftFinal) SECTION 17505
ANALYZERS: RESIDUAL CHLORINE
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Residual chlorine analyzers.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures and Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of calibration instruments.

C. Furnish commissioning Submittals listed below, as specified in this Section, and Section 01756 - Commissioning:

1. Manufacturer’s representative qualifications.

2. Owner training.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Examine the complete set of Contract Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions including:

1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc.

2. Physical conditions:
a. Installation and mounting requirements.
b. Location within the process.
c. Accessories: Verify that required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

Analyzers: Residual Chlorine
17505-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17505 (DraftFinal)

1.06 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. Project environmental conditions as specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.07 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Notify the Engineer if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer’s recommendations or specifications.

1.08 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

1.09 MAINTENANCE
A. Furnish parts, materials, fluids, etc., necessary for operation, maintenance, and calibration purposes throughout the warranty period. Deliver these supplies before project substantial completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide instruments identified in the Contract Documents.

2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Provide instruments suitable for the installed site conditions including, but not limited to, material compatibility, site altitude, site seismic conditions, humidity, and process and ambient temperatures.

B. Sensor probe and transmitter must be from the same manufacturer.

2.03 MANUFACTURERS
A. Colorimetric residual analyzers:

1. The following or equal:
a. HACH, CL17sc.
1) Transmitter Model sc4500.

2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. As specified in this Section, including Attachment A - ISA Datasheet - Analyzers:

Residual Chlorine.

B. Colorimetric residual analyzers:

1. General:
a. Residual chlorine analyzer utilizing the DPD colorimetric method to provide accurate measurements independent of swings in pH or alkalinity levels in the sample source.

Analyzers: Residual Chlorine
17505-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17505 (DraftFinal) b. Convert from free to total chlorine by changing reagents:
1) Measure a sample blank before each sample measurement to provide zero reference compensation for sample color and turbidity, changes in light intensity due to voltage fluctuations, or light intensity.

2. Performance requirements:
a. Complete analysis every 2.5 minutes for free or total chlorine residual. b. Designed for 30 days of unattended operation, with less than 500 milliliters of reagent used per month.
c. Accuracy:
1) Within 5 percent of reading or within 0.035 milligrams per liters. d. Range:
1) 0 to 5 milligrams per liters free or total residual. e. Repeatability:
1) Within 5 percent or 0.05 milligrams per liters.

3. Transmitter:
a. Microprocessor-based signal converter/transmitter:
1) Self-diagnostic functions available via the alphanumeric, menu-driven keyboard.
b. Power supply:
1) 120 VAC.
c. Outputs:
1) Isolated 4 to 20 milliamperes DC.
2) As indicated on the instrument data sheets.
3) Relay outputs:
a) SPST relay contacts: 2.
b) Selectable to activate on the following conditions:
(1) High or low sample concentration.
(2) Analyzer system warning.
(3) Analyzer system shutdown.
d. Enclosure:
1) Rating: NEMA 4X.
2) Clear polycarbonate windows.
3) Wall mounted.
e. Display:
1) LCD, 3-digit readout, and 6-character alphanumeric scrolling text line.
f. Light source:
1) Class I LED (light emitting diode), with peak wavelength of 520 nanometer; 50,000 hours estimated minimum life.

2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide sun shades for outdoor installations.

B. Provide surge suppression for outdoor installations.

Analyzers: Residual Chlorine
17505-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17505 (DraftFinal)

2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory calibrate each instrument with a minimum 3-point calibration or according to Manufacturer’s standard at a facility that is traceable to the NIST.

1. Submit calibration datasheets to the Engineer at least 30 days before shipment of the instruments to the project site.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the installation location for the instrument and verify that the instrument will work properly when installed.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

3.03 COMMISSIONING
A. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

3.04 SCHEDULES
A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments.

Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents:

1. Instruments may be indicated on the Drawings, specified in the Specifications, or both.

END OF SECTION
Analyzers: Residual Chlorine
17505-Attachment A 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17505 (DraftFinal) ATTACHMENT A - ISA DATASHEET - ANALYZERS: RESIDUAL CHLORINE

Analyzer Transmitter

PROJECT INFORMATION

PLANT CAMPUS OAKS & MISTY WOODS

ASR FACILITIES

CUSTOMER CITY OF ROSEVILLE
PROJECT 11843A10_P3 LOCATION ROSEVILLE CA
GENERAL NOTE: FIELDS SHOWN WITH THE [*] SYMBOL ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE DATASHEET BUT MAY BE REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETE ISA DATASHEETS FOR EACH INSTRUMENT PER ALL SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS.

GENERAL
TAG WD33-AITX-30205 (WD33-AEXX30205)POWER LOCATION WD31-PLCX-30101 SPECIFICATION NUMBER 17505 MEASURING PRINCIPLE COLORIMETRIC DRAWING NUMBER 13N06 PLC WD31-PLCX-30101
SERVICE CHLORINE RESIDUAL ANALYZER TYPICAL DETAILS [*]
FLUID
FLUID WATER PRESSURE LESS THAN 120
MEASUREMENT RANGE 0-10 MG/L TEMPERATURE 50 DEG F
SAMPLE FLOW [*] SAMPLE TEMPERATURE 40 - 80 DEG F
SAMPLE pH 1-14

ELEMENT
ELEMENT TAG NO. WD33-AEXX-30205 PROCESS CONNECTION INSERTION ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4 HAZARDOUS APPROVALS N/A

CLEANING APPARATUS NO ELEMENT MOUNTING KIT FLOW ASSEMBLY

TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER TAG NO. WD33-AITX-30205 SIGNAL OUTPUT AI
ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4 OUTPUT 4-20 MA

SURGE PROTECTION NO
TRANS. HAZ APPROVALS N/A

RELAY OPTIONS YES
TRANS. MOUNTING REM
POWER 120VAC-1P
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 80 DEG F

AIR CLEANING SYSTEM NO
NOTES
[*]
11843A10_P3 17505

Page 1 ends

Analyzer Transmitter

PROJECT INFORMATION

PLANT CAMPUS OAKS & MISTY WOODS

ASR FACILITIES

CUSTOMER CITY OF ROSEVILLE
PROJECT 11843A10_P3 LOCATION ROSEVILLE CA
GENERAL NOTE: FIELDS SHOWN WITH THE [*] SYMBOL ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE DATASHEET BUT MAY BE REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETE ISA DATASHEETS FOR EACH INSTRUMENT PER ALL SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS.

GENERAL
TAG WD33-AITX-36205 (WD33-AEXX36205)POWER LOCATION WD31-PLCX-36101 SPECIFICATION NUMBER 17505 MEASURING PRINCIPLE COLORIMETRIC DRAWING NUMBER 19N06 PLC WD31-PLCX-36101
SERVICE CHLORINE RESIDUAL ANALYZER TYPICAL DETAILS [*]
FLUID
FLUID WATER PRESSURE LESS THAN 120
MEASUREMENT RANGE 0-10 MG/L TEMPERATURE 50 DEG F
SAMPLE FLOW [*] SAMPLE TEMPERATURE 40 - 80 DEG F
SAMPLE pH 1-14

ELEMENT
ELEMENT TAG NO. WD33-AEXX-36205 PROCESS CONNECTION INSERTION ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4 HAZARDOUS APPROVALS N/A

CLEANING APPARATUS NO ELEMENT MOUNTING KIT FLOW ASSEMBLY

TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER TAG NO. WD33-AITX-36205 SIGNAL OUTPUT AI
ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4 OUTPUT 4-20 MA

SURGE PROTECTION NO
TRANS. HAZ APPROVALS N/A

RELAY OPTIONS YES
TRANS. MOUNTING REM
POWER 120VAC-1P
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 80 DEG F

AIR CLEANING SYSTEM NO
NOTES
[*]
11843A10_P3 17505

Page 2 ends

Analyzers: Fluoride
17529-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17529 (DraftFinal) SECTION 17529
ANALYZERS: FLUORIDE
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Fluoride analyzers.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures and 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Furnish commissioning submittals listed below and specified in this Section as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning:

1. Manufacturer’s representative qualifications.

2. Owner training.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Examine the complete set of Contract Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions including:

1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc.

2. Physical conditions:
a. Installation and mounting requirements.
b. Location within the process.
c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation.

C. Provide instruments manufactured at facilities certified to the quality standards of ISO 9001.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

Analyzers: Fluoride
17529-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17529 (DraftFinal)

1.06 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. Project environmental conditions as specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.07 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Notify the Engineer if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer’s recommendations or specifications.

1.08 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

1.09 MAINTENANCE
A. Furnish all parts, materials, fluids, etc., necessary for operation, maintenance, and calibration purposes throughout the warranty period. Deliver all of these supplies before project substantial completion.

B. Furnish the following spare parts:

1. Spare pump.

2. Spare sensor.

3. 3 Pump tubes.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide all instruments as identified in the Contract Documents.

2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Provide instruments suitable for the installed site conditions including, but not limited to, material compatibility, site altitude, site seismic conditions, humidity, and process and ambient temperatures.

2.03 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following, no equal:

1. Prominent, same as what is installed at Westbrook and Solaire facilities.

2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Fluoride analyzer:

1. Model D1Cb: D1CBW00601000VF1211G00EN.

2. Package to include the following:
a. Sensor module: DLG IV.
b. Backboard 24-inch W x 24-inch H.
c. Sample valve.
d. PT100 temperature probe (P/N 1002856).

Analyzers: Fluoride
17529-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17529 (DraftFinal) e. Reference electrode (P/N 1083790).
f. Fluoride sensor 0-10 PPM (P/N 1028279).
g. Transducer (P/N 1028280).

2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory calibrate each instrument with a minimum 3-point calibration or according to Manufacturer’s standard at a facility that is traceable to the NIST:

1. Submit calibration data sheets to the Engineer at least 30 days before shipment of the instruments to the project site.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the installation location for the instrument and verify that the instrument will work properly when installed:

1. Notify the Engineer promptly if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer’s recommendations or specifications.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

3.03 COMMISSIONING
A. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

END OF SECTION

Analyzers: Fluoride
17529-Attachment A 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17529 (DraftFinal) ATTACHMENT A - ISA DATASHEET - ANALYZERS: FLOURIDE

Analyzer Transmitter

PROJECT INFORMATION

PLANT CAMPUS OAKS & MISTY WOODS

ASR FACILITIES

CUSTOMER CITY OF ROSEVILLE
PROJECT 11843A10_P3 LOCATION ROSEVILLE CA
GENERAL NOTE: FIELDS SHOWN WITH THE [*] SYMBOL ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE DATASHEET BUT MAY BE REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETE ISA DATASHEETS FOR EACH INSTRUMENT PER ALL SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS.

GENERAL
TAG WD33-AITX-30307 (WD33-AEXX30307)POWER LOCATION WD31-PLCX-30101 SPECIFICATION NUMBER 17529 MEASURING PRINCIPLE COLORIMETRIC DRAWING NUMBER 13N06 PLC WD31-PLCX-30101
SERVICE FLUORIDE ANALYZER TYPICAL DETAILS [*]
FLUID
FLUID WATER PRESSURE LESS THAN 120 PSI
MEASUREMENT RANGE 0-10 PPM TEMPERATURE 50 DEG F
SAMPLE FLOW [*] SAMPLE TEMPERATURE 40 - 80 DEG F
SAMPLE pH 1-14

ELEMENT
ELEMENT TAG NO. WD33-AEXX-30307 PROCESS CONNECTION INSERTION ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4X HAZARDOUS APPROVALS N/A

CLEANING APPARATUS NO ELEMENT MOUNTING KIT FLOW ASSEMBLY

TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER TAG NO. WD33-AITX-30307 SIGNAL OUTPUT AI
ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4 OUTPUT 4-20 MA

SURGE PROTECTION NO
TRANS. HAZ APPROVALS N/A

RELAY OPTIONS YES
TRANS. MOUNTING REM
POWER 120VAC-1P
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 80 DEG F

AIR CLEANING SYSTEM NO
NOTES
[*]
11843A10_P3 17529

Page 1 ends

Analyzer Transmitter

PROJECT INFORMATION

PLANT CAMPUS OAKS & MISTY WOODS

ASR FACILITIES

CUSTOMER CITY OF ROSEVILLE
PROJECT 11843A10_P3 LOCATION ROSEVILLE CA
GENERAL NOTE: FIELDS SHOWN WITH THE [*] SYMBOL ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE DATASHEET BUT MAY BE REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETE ISA DATASHEETS FOR EACH INSTRUMENT PER ALL SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS.

GENERAL
TAG WD33-AITX-36307 (WD33-AEXX36307)POWER LOCATION WD31-PLCX-36101 SPECIFICATION NUMBER 17529 MEASURING PRINCIPLE COLORIMETRIC DRAWING NUMBER 19N06 PLC WD31-PLCX-36101
SERVICE FLUORIDE ANALYZER TYPICAL DETAILS [*]
FLUID
FLUID WATER PRESSURE LESS THAN 120 PSI
MEASUREMENT RANGE 0-10 PPM TEMPERATURE 50 DEG F
SAMPLE FLOW [*] SAMPLE TEMPERATURE 40 - 80 DEG F
SAMPLE pH 1-14

ELEMENT
ELEMENT TAG NO. WD33-AEXX-36307 PROCESS CONNECTION INSERTION ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4X HAZARDOUS APPROVALS N/A

CLEANING APPARATUS NO ELEMENT MOUNTING KIT FLOW ASSEMBLY

TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER TAG NO. WD33-AITX-36307 SIGNAL OUTPUT AI
ENCLOSURE CLASS NEMA 4 OUTPUT 4-20 MA

SURGE PROTECTION NO
TRANS. HAZ APPROVALS N/A

RELAY OPTIONS YES
TRANS. MOUNTING REM
POWER 120VAC-1P
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 80 DEG F

AIR CLEANING SYSTEM NO
NOTES
[*]
11843A10_P3 17529

Page 2 ends

Control Systems: Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components 17710-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17710 (DraftFinal) SECTION 17710
CONTROL SYSTEMS: PANELS, ENCLOSURES, AND PANEL COMPONENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 GENERAL...............................................................................................................2

1.01 SUMMARY .................................................................................................................2

1.02 REFERENCES ...........................................................................................................2

1.03 TERMINOLOGY .........................................................................................................3

1.04 DELEGATED DESIGN ...............................................................................................3

1.05 SUBMITTALS .............................................................................................................3

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE .............................................................................................4

1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS.............................................................................4

1.08 WARRANTY ...............................................................................................................4 PART 2 PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................4

2.01 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................4

2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA................................................................4

2.03 MATERIALS ...............................................................................................................5

2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS ..........................................................................................5

2.05 ACCESSORIES........................................................................................................22

2.06 FINISHES.................................................................................................................23 PART 3 EXECUTION..........................................................................................................24

3.01 PREPARATION........................................................................................................24

3.02 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................24

3.03 COMMISSIONING....................................................................................................25 Control Systems: Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components 17710-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17710 (DraftFinal) PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Design, fabrication and assembly of instrumentation enclosures, control panels and components provided under this Contract, including, but not limited to:
a. Custom built instrumentation and control panels, including enclosures for hand stations controllers, low voltage power distribution and marshalling panels.
b. Control panels furnished as part of equipment systems specified in other Divisions, such as vendor control panels (VCPs) and chemical feed panels. c. Control components.
d. Control panel installation.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Standards:

1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):
a. C62.41.1 - Guide on the Surge Environment in Low-Voltage (1,000 V and less) AC Power Circuits.
b. 802.3af - Standard for Information Technology Telecommunications and Information Exchange Between Systems - Local and Metropolitan Area Networks - Specific Requirements Part 3: Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications.
c. 802.3at - Standard for Information Technology -- Local and Metropolitan area networks -- Specific requirements -- Part 3: CSMA/CD Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications Amendment 3: Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) Power via the Media Dependent Interface (MDI) Enhancements.

2. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC):
a. 61643-11 - Low-Voltage Surge Protective Devices - Part 11: Surge Protective Devices Connected to Low-Voltage Power Systems - Requirements and test methods.
b. 61643-21 - Low-Voltage Surge Protective Devices - Part 21: Surge Protective Devices Connected to Telecommunications and Signaling Networks - Performance Requirements and Testing Methods.

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).

4. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
a. 248-14 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 14: Supplemental Fuses. b. 497B - Standard for Protectors for Data Communications and Fire-Alarm Circuits.
c. 508 - Standard for Industrial Control Equipment.
d. 508A - Standard for Industrial Control Panel.
e. 698A - Standard for Industrial Control Panels Relating to Hazardous (Classified) Locations.

Control Systems: Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components 17710-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17710 (DraftFinal) f. 913 - Standard for Intrinsically Safe Apparatus and Associated Apparatus for Use in Class I, II, III, Division 1, Hazardous (Classified) Locations. g. 1077 - Standard for Supplementary Protectors for Use in Electrical Equipment.
h. 1283 - Standard for Electromagnetic Interference Filters. i. 1310 - Standard for Class 2 Power Units.
j. 1449 - Standard for Surge Protective Devices.

1.03 TERMINOLOGY
A. The words and terms listed below are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in this Section, have the indicated meaning.

1. The term “panel” in this Section is interchangeable with the term “enclosure.”

1.04 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. As specified in Section 01357 - Delegated Design Procedures.

B. Anchoring and bracing.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures and Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Provide a control panel hardware Submittal for each control panel/enclosure being provided on this Project, including, but not limited to:

1. Product data:
a. Enclosure construction details and NEMA type.
b. Manufacturer’s literature and specification datasheets for each type of equipment to be installed within or on the panel or enclosure.

2. Shop Drawings:
a. Scaled, detailed exterior panel (front and side views) and interior panel layout showing equipment arrangement and dimensional information:
1) Provide draft for review and approval by the Engineer. Engineer has the authority to substantially alter initial panel layouts. b. Complete nameplate engraving schedule.
c. Structural details of fabricated panels.

3. Calculations:
a. Cooling calculations, including, but not limited to:
1) Highest expected ambient temperature for the enclosure’s location. 2) Internal heat load.
3) Exposure to direct sunlight.
4) Dimensions of the enclosure in inches.
5) Maximum allowable temperature inside the enclosure, based on the lowest operating temperature limit of the installed components.

Control Systems: Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components 17710-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17710 (DraftFinal) C. Delegated Design Submittals:

1. Anchoring and bracing: Provide project-specific calculations based on support conditions and requirements to resist loads specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria:
a. To structures for equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C, D, E, or F.
b. For equipment installed outdoors.
c. For wall mounted equipment weighing 125 pounds or more.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Assemble panels, enclosures, and rack systems along with internal and external devices, wiring, equipment, and materials in a facility that is recognized by UL to assemble and certify UL-labeled control panels:

1. Provide components and equipment with UL 508 listing.

2. Control panels shall be UL 508A labeled, unless the equipment in the panel and the design in the Contract Documents cannot be reasonably modified to meet the requirements for UL 508A labeling.

3. Provide fuses for equipment that is not UL or UR listed.

4. Install intrinsically safe circuits and equipment in accordance with UL 698A.

1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.08 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide control panels identified in the Contract Documents.

2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Panel dimensions:

1. It is the responsibility of the Contractor or manufacturer to design and size panels:
a. Size panels to provide space for equipment, wiring, terminations, and other items in the panel, including 20 percent of the total back panel area shall remain empty.
b. Maximum panel depth: 16 inches, unless approved by the end user.

Control Systems: Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components 17710-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17710 (DraftFinal) B. Provide equipment and components that are fully rated for the Site elevation and operating environment where the equipment will be installed as specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria and as indicated on the Drawings.

C. Non-conditioned spaces and outdoor installations:

1. Provide additional temperature conditioning equipment to maintain the equipment temperature within a band of 10 degrees Fahrenheit above the minimum operating temperature and 10 degrees Fahrenheit below maximum operating temperature.

D. As listed below in the individual component paragraphs.

1. Provide conditioning equipment incorporated into the equipment to maintain the enclosures within the equipment manufacturer’s specified operating ranges.

2.03 MATERIALS
A. Construct and finish enclosures using materials capable of withstanding the mechanical, electrical, and thermal stresses, as well as the effects of humidity and corrosion that are likely to be encountered in normal service:

1. Enclosures shall have the following properties:
a. NEMA Type 1: Steel.
b. NEMA Type 4: Steel with gasketed door, raintight.
c. NEMA Type 4X: Type 316 stainless steel.
d. NEMA Type 12: Steel with gasketed door, dusttight.
e. NEMA Type 7: Cast aluminum.

B. Bolting material:

1. Commercial quality 1/2-inch diameter, stainless steel hex-head Grade 5 bolts, nuts, and washers, with unified coarse (UNC) threads.

2. Carriage bolts for attaching end plates.

3. Other bolted joints shall have S.A.E. standard lock washers.

2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Panels/enclosures:

1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. nVent/Hoffman.
b. Rittal.
c. Saginaw Control & Engineering. (This was selected for use at Westbrook and Solaire).

2. Panel assembly:
a. General guidelines for panel fabrication include:
1) Continuous welds ground smooth.
2) Exposed surfaces free of burrs and sharp edges.
3) Base formed of heavy channel iron, either galvanized or powder coated, minimum 1/2-inch holes at 12-inch spacing to accommodate anchoring of freestanding enclosures to floor.

Control Systems: Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components 17710-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17710 (DraftFinal) b. Construct enclosure and mounting panel using stretcher-level quality sheet metal having minimum thickness not less than the following sizes (U.S. Standard Gauge):

Enclosure Height (inches)
Minimum Enclosure Steel
Thickness (gauge)
Minimum Back Mounting
Panel Thickness (gauge)
Wall-mounted up to 48 14 14
Up to 57 12 12
57 to 69 12 10
69 to 82 12, except 10 on back 10
82 or more 10 10
1) Use heavier sheet metal to meet seismic requirements at the Project Site or when required due to equipment requirements.
c. For Rittal or engineer-approved equal free-standing modular enclosure, construct enclosure and mounting panel using stretcher-level quality sheet metal having minimum thickness not less than the following sizes (U.S. Standard Gauge):

Enclosure Height (inches)
Minimum Enclosure Steel
Thickness (gauge)
Minimum Back Mounting
Panel Thickness (gauge)
Wall-mounted up to 48 16 14
Up to 57 14 13
57 or more 16 11
d. Construct supporting frame structure with angled, channeled, or folded rigid section of sheet metal, rigidly attached to and having essentially the same outer dimensions as the enclosure surface and having sufficient torsional rigidity to resist the bending moments applied via the enclosure surface when it is deflected.
e. Provide stiffeners for back mounting or C folded back panels in enclosures larger than 4 feet. In addition, secure the panels in place by collar studs welded to the enclosure.
f. Door construction:
1) Turned-back edges suitably braced and supported to maintain alignment and rigidity without sagging.
2) Sufficient width to permit door opening without interference with rear projection of flush-mounted instruments.
3) Heavy-gauge stainless steel hinges.
4) For NEMA Type 12, Type 4, and Type 4X, provide oil-resistant neoprene sealing gasket and adhesive to seal cover to enclosure. 5) Gasket installed to seal against roll lip on the enclosure opening. g. Latches:
1) For panels, provide each door with an oil tight 3-point latching mechanism and locking handle with rollers on the ends of the latch rods. Latch rods shall be connected to a common door handle, hold doors securely, and form a compressed seal between door and gasket, at the top, side, and bottom.
a) Provide padlock for each enclosure with padlock provisions.

Control Systems: Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components 17710-7 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17710 (DraftFinal) b) Provide 2 keys per panel.
c) All locks keyed alike.
2) For Rittal or engineer-approved equal free-standing modular enclosure, provide each door with a 4-point latching mechanism, if available, or a 2-point latching mechanism if a 4-point is not available. 3) For cabinets not available with 3-point latching hardware, provide multiple clips and padlock hasps.
h. Panel cut-outs:
1) Cut, punch, or drill cutouts for instruments, devices, and windows.

Smoothly finish with rounded edges.
2) Allow a minimum of 3-inch envelope around displays, controllers, and monitors.
3) Reinforce around cut-outs with steel angles or flat bars for the following:
a) Large panel cutouts; for example, openings for local operator interfaces.
b) Pilot device groupings, where the removed metal exceeds 50 percent of the available metal.
i. NEMA Type 4X powder-coated stainless steel enclosures are not an acceptable substitute for stainless steel unless indicated on the Drawings.

3. Indoor enclosures shall be NEMA 12.

4. Outdoor panels. Supplementary requirements for panels located outdoors are as follows:
a. Shall be NEMA 4X.
b. Enclosures located outdoors shall be explicitly designed and rated for outdoor service by the manufacturer.
c. Door hardware: Stainless steel.
d. Provide factory installed rain canopy and sun shield for enclosures with operator interface panels.
e. Bases: Heavy channel, gasketed stainless steel bases, flanges up, for anchoring to pad.

B. Arrangement of components:

1. Arrange panel internal components for external conduit and piping to enter into panel either from above or below.

2. Arrange panel instruments and control devices in a logical configuration, associating pushbutton and selector switches with related readout devices.

3. Mount internal control components on an internal back panel. Devices shall not be mounted on the side panel.

4. Control panel mounted operator interface devices shall be mounted between 3 feet and 5 feet above finished floor.

5. Components shall be install according to their manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.

6. Heat generating components shall be install towards the top of the enclosure.

7. The PLC shall be mounted between 42 inches and 60 inches above the finished floor. The finished floor is considered the floor that a person would stand on comfortably to access the PLC (i.e., housekeeping pad).

8. Panels not containing a PLC shall have a maximum depth of 18 inches.

9. Panels shall be designed such that there is a sufficient clearance to allow air flow for cooling, heating, and condensate prevention, within the maximum Control Systems: Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components 17710-8 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17710 (DraftFinal) depth requirement. Components requiring ventilation shall follow the manufacturer’s installation instructions to ensure proper air flow.

10. Panels shall be sized such that all terminal strips and components such as relays and isolators are mounted on the enclosure back panel. Mounting of wiring terminals strips and panel components on the panel side walls is not allowed.

C. Overcurrent protection:

1. Main overcurrent device:
a. Control panels supplied with 120 VAC:
1) Provide an internal breaker with the line side terminals covered by a barrier.
2) Provide a nameplate prominently positioned on the control panel identifying the location of the power source and a warning statement requiring the source to be disconnected before opening the door to the enclosure.
3) Provide a nameplate prominently positioned on the control panel stating “CAUTION Risk of Electric Shock - UPS equipment outputs remain energized with main disconnect in off position” for any panel containing a UPS.

2. Provide circuit breakers as specified in Section 16412 - Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers.

3. Selection and ratings of protective devices:
a. Interrupting ratings: Not less than the system maximum available fault current at the point of application.
b. Voltage rating: Not less than the voltage of the application. c. Select current rating and trip characteristics to be suitable for:
1) Maximum normal operating current.
2) Inrush characteristics.
3) Coordination of the protective devices to each other and to the source breaker feeding the panel.
d. Circuit breakers, fuses, and motor overcurrent protection devices used for branch circuit protection must be UL 508A compliant.
1) Circuit breakers listed under UL 1077 Standard for Supplementary Protectors that do not comply with UL 508A requirements are not acceptable.
2) Miscellaneous, miniature, and micro fuses listed under UL 248 Part 14 that do not comply with UL 508A requirements are not acceptable. 3) Manual motor controllers provided with an instantaneous-trip overcurrent mechanism listed under UL 508 that do not comply with UL 508A requirements are not acceptable.

4. Provide a separate protective device for each powered electrical device:
a. An individual circuit breaker for each 120-VAC instrument installed within its respective control panel and clearly identified for function. b. An individual fuse for each PLC discrete output. Provide with individual blown fuse indication external of the I/O card:
1) Size external fuse to open before any I/O-card-mounted fuses.

Control Systems: Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components 17710-9 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17710 (DraftFinal) c. Individual discrete inputs shall use a 1/2-amp fuse. 1) The Carollo standard has been overruled by the City standard which is.
a) Discrete and Analog inputs shall use a knife disconnect with each individual input.
d. Individual discrete output:
a) Size external fuse to open before any I/O-card-mounted fuses. 2) Analog loop powered from the control panel:
a) 0.25-amp fuse.
b) The Carollo standard has been overruled by the City standard which is.
(1) No fuse is required for individual analog loops.
e. Install protective devices on the back mounting panel and identify by a service nameplate in accordance with the wiring diagrams.

5. Fuses for analog and discrete control loops:
a. Provide durable, readily visible label for each fuse, clearly indicating the correct type, size, and ratings of replacement fuse:
1) Label shall not cover or interfere with equipment manufacturer’s instructions.
b. Provide fuses rated for the voltage and available short-circuit current at which they are applied.
c. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Bussmann.
2) Ferraz Shawmut.
3) Littelfuse.

6. Fuse holders:
a. Modular type:
1) DIN rail mounting on 35-millimeter rail.
2) Touch-safe design: Connection terminals to be protected against accidental touch.
3) Incorporates blown-fuse indicator with an ampere draw less than

2.3 mA.
4) Plug-in style fuse terminals and fuse plugs are not acceptable. b. Provide nameplate identifying each fuse:
1) As specified in Section 16075 - Identification for Electrical Systems. c. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Allen-Bradley, 1492-FB Series B. (This was selected for Westbrook and Solaire.)
2) Phoenix Contact, UT4-HESI Series.

7. Control circuit breakers:
a. DIN rail mounting on 35-millimeter rail.
b. Manual OPEN-CLOSE toggle switch.
c. Rated for 250 VAC.
d. Interrupting rating: 10 kA or available fault current at the line terminal, whichever is higher.
e. Current ratings: As required for the application.
f. Provide nameplate identifying each circuit breaker:
1) As specified in Section 16075 - Identification for Electrical Systems. g. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) ABB.
2) Allen-Bradley. (1489-M was selected for Westbrook and Solaire.) Control Systems: Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components 17710-10 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17710 (DraftFinal) 3) Phoenix Contact, TMC Series.
4) Square D.

8. Electronic circuit protectors:
a. Used where a NEC Class 2 power circuit is required.
b. Confirms to NEC Class 2 according to UL 1310.
c. DIN rail mounting on 35-millimeter rail.
d. Power source:
1) Operating voltage: 24 VDC.
2) Output current ratings: As required for the application. 3) Maximum output current: 4 A.
4) Maximum nameplate rating: 100 VA.
e. LED for status indication.
f. Remote status contact.
g. When using multi-channel electronic circuit protectors, distribute devices such that a failure is limited to a single network or segment. h. Provide nameplate identifying each circuit electronic circuit protector module:
1) As specified in Section 16075 - Identification for Electrical Systems. i. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Single channel:
a) Allen-Bradley, 1694 series.
b) Phoenix Contact, PTCB E1 series.
2) Multi-channel:
a) Rockwell Automation 1692-TD014.
b) Puls PISA11 series. (This was selected for Westbrook and Solaire.)
D. Conductors and cables:

1. Power and control wiring:
a. Materials: Stranded, soft annealed copper.
b. Insulation: 600 VAC type MTW.
c. Minimum sizes:
1) Primary power distribution: 12 AWG, no smaller.
2) Secondary power distribution: 14 AWG.
3) Indicating light circuits shall be 18 AWG.
4) Control: 16 AWG.
d. Control Panel and Instrumentation Wire Color:
1) (+) 24 VDC: Red.
2) (-) 24 VDC: Gray.
3) Analog Signal: Positive (+) = Black, Negative (-) = Clear. 4) Discrete Events and Low Voltage Control: Positive (+) = Red, Negative (-) = Gray.
5) Ground: Green.
6) 120 VAC Power (L1): Black.
7) 120 VAC Neutral (L2): White.
8) 120 VAC Control: Violet.
9) 120 VAC Ground: Green.

2. Signal cables:
a. Materials: Stranded, soft annealed copper.
b. Insulation: 600 VAC, PVC outer jacket.
c. Minimum size: 18 AWG paired triad.

Control Systems: Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components 17710-11 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17710 (DraftFinal) d. Overall aluminum shield (tape).
e. Twisted pair.
f. Copper drain wire.
g. Color:
1) 2-conductor:
a) Positive (+): Black.
b) Negative (-): Clear.
2) 3-conductor:
a) Positive (+): Black.
b) Negative (-): Clear.
c) Signal: White.
h. Insulate the foil shielding and exposed drain wire for each signal cable with heat-shrink tubing.

E. Conductor identification:

1. Identify each conductor and cable with unique wire numbers as specified in Section 16075 - Identification for Electrical Systems.

2. Readily identified without twisting the conductor.

F. General wiring requirements:

1. Wiring methods: Wiring methods and materials for panels shall be in accordance with the NEC requirements for General Purpose (no open wiring) unless otherwise specified.

2. Install components in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions included in the listing and labeling.

3. Provide a nameplate on the cover of the control panel identifying sources of power supply and foreign voltages within the control panel.

4. Provide transformers, protective devices, and power supplies required to convert the supply voltage to the needed utilization voltage.

5. Provide power surge protection for control panels.

6. Provide signal surge protection within control panels for each analog I/O, discrete I/O, and data line (Copper Ethernet, Coax, Fieldbus signals) that originates from outdoor devices.

7. Provide non-metallic ducts for routing and organization of conductors and cables:
a. Provide wiring separation plan.
b. Size ducts for ultimate build-out of the panel, or for 50-percent spare, whichever is greater. Duct shall not exceed 50 percent capacity. c. Provide separate ducts for signal and low voltage wiring from power and 120 VAC control wiring:
1) 120 VAC: Grey colored ducts.
2) 24 VDC: White colored ducts.

8. Cables shall be fastened with cable-mounting clamps or with cable ties supported by any of the following methods:
a. Screw-on cable tie mounts.
b. Hammer-on cable-tie mounting clips.
c. Fingers of the nonmetallic duct.

9. Wire ties:
a. No wire ties inside wire duct. Outside duct is allowed at intervals not exceeding 6 inches unless longer unsupported runs are required for Control Systems: Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components 17710-12 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17710 (DraftFinal) access or maintenance. Wiring to doors shall be installed such that bending is axial.
b. Use a cable tie installation tool, with tension control/cutoff. 1) Verify cut ends are cut flush filed smooth after installed, not sharp.

10. Flexible stranded copper wiring shall be used throughout.

11. Where shielding is required, shields shall be continuous foil or metalized plastic providing 100 percent coverage. A drain wire in continuous contact with the shield shall be included. Drain wires shall only be terminated at the PLC panel to prevent ground loops.

12. Provide supports at the ends of cables to prevent mechanical stresses at the termination of conductors.

13. Support panel conductors where necessary to keep them in place.

14. Wiring to rear terminals on panel-mount instruments shall be run in nonmetallic duct secured to horizontal brackets run adjacent to the instruments.

15. Conductors and cables shall be run from terminal to terminal without splice or joints. Exceptions:
a. Factory-applied connectors molded onto cables shall be permitted. Such connectors shall not be considered as splices or joints.

16. Control panel shall be the source of power for 120 VAC devices interconnected with the control panel, including, but not limited to:
a. Solenoid valves.
b. Instruments both mounted in the control panel and remotely connected to the control panel.

17. Field wiring shall be run into a pull box mounted adjacent to a PLC panel.

There shall be no conduit penetrations directly into the top or bottom of the PLC enclosure field wiring for other types of panels should be routed to minimize the possibility of moisture accumulation inside panels.

G. Provide power circuits for Contractor- and vendor-furnished PLC cabinets in accordance with the PLC and instrument power wiring diagrams indicated on the Drawings or as specified.

H. Thermal management:

1. Provide heating, cooling, and dehumidifying devices in order to maintain instrumentation and control devices to within a range as specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation.

2. Enclosure temperature sensor:
a. Provide wall-mounted RTD transmitter to measure internal cabinet temperature in enclosures containing electrical components such as PLCs, RTUs, RIO, and VFDs.
b. Sensor and electronic enclosure.
c. Accuracy: Within 2 degrees Fahrenheit.
d. Platinum RTD.
e. 4-20mA DC output:
1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a) Veris, TEC00. (This was selected for Westbrook and Solaire.) b) Omega, EWS Series.
c) TCS Basys Controls, TS Series.

3. Status relays and discrete inputs for switches, and power supplies):
a. Provide as indicated on the Drawings or as specified.

Control Systems: Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components 17710-13 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17710 (DraftFinal)

4. Air conditioning units and strip heaters shall be provided on outdoor panels or panels which are not in I temperature controlled environment. Panels located within a temperature controlled environment may use internal fans to provide panel ventilation. Filters are required on intake and exhaust openings.

I. Pilot devices:

1. General:
a. Provide operator pushbuttons, switches, and pilot lights, from a single manufacturer.
b. Size:
1) 30.5 millimeters.
c. Heavy duty.
d. Pushbuttons:
1) Contacts rated:
a) NEMA Type A600.
2) Furnish 1 spare normally open contact and normally closed contact with each switch.
3) Equipment shutdown (ESD): Palm or mushroom-head type with self-latching feature. ESD device will remain in the actuated position until deliberately reset.
e. Selector switches:
1) Contacts rated:
a) NEMA Type A600.
b) Knob type.
2) Furnish 1 spare normally open contact and normally closed contact with each switch.
3) Provisions for locking in the OFF position where lockout provisions are indicated on the Drawings.
f. Pilot lights:
1) Type:
a) LED for interior installations.
2) Push to test.
3) Lamp color:
a) On/Running/Start/Closed: Red.
b) Off/Stop/Opened: Green.
c) Power/Auto: White.
d) Alarm: Amber.

2. Indoor and outdoor areas:
a. NEMA Type 4/13.
b. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Allen-Bradley, Type 800T.
2) General Electric, Type CR104P.
3) IDEC, TWND Series.
4) Schneider Electric, Class 9001, Type K.

3. Corrosive areas:
a. NEMA Type 4X.
b. Corrosion resistant.
c. Exterior parts of high-impact strength fiberglass-reinforced polyester or multiple-layer epoxy-coated zinc.
d. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Allen-Bradley, Type 800H.

Control Systems: Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components 17710-14 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17710 (DraftFinal) 2) Cutler Hammer, Type E34.
3) IDEC, TWND Series.
4) Schneider Electric, Class 9001, Type SK.

4. Hazardous (classified) areas/Class I Division 2:
a. NEMA Type 4X.
b. Corrosion resistant.
c. Exterior parts of high-impact strength fiberglass-reinforced polyester or multiple-layer epoxy-coated zinc:
1) Contacts contained within a hermetically sealed chamber:
a) Pushbuttons.
b) Selector switches.
c) Push-to-test contacts on pilot lights.
2) UL listed and labeled for Class I Division 2 areas.
d. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Allen-Bradley, Type 800H.
2) Cutler Hammer, Type E34.

J. Signal isolators and converters:

1. Signal interface modules shall be used on each circuit to isolate PLC analog input (AI) modules from the external field instruments and circuits. They may also be used for signal conversion, i.e., a voltage signal to a current signal (E to I).

2. The end user’s standard is that all hardwired PLC analog inputs are 4-20mA, and that isolators are used. These are typically, current to current convertors, however voltage to current converters are sometimes used when the field device provides a voltage signal. Analog input isolators shall be din rail mountable and grouped together within the panel. Circuits shall be designed such that the failure of one field device or isolator shall not cause multiple points to fail.

3. Isolator linearity deviations shall be no greater than +/-0.02 percent of span, and shall be rated at no greater than +/- 0.02 percent deviation per degree Celsius throughout the specified interior temperature of the panel. Zero and span settings shall be adjustable for all signals isolators.

4. Furnish signal isolators that provide complete isolation of input, output, and power input:
a. Minimum isolation level: 1.0 kilovolts AC/50 hertz for at least 1 minute. b. Adjustable span and zero.
c. Ambient temperature range: -4 degrees to 149 degrees Fahrenheit.

5. Manufacturers: One of the following:
a. Phoenix Contact, Mini Analog Pro.
b. Acromag, 1500, 600T, 800T, Flat Pack, or ACR Series. c. Action Instruments, Q500 Series or Ultra SlimPakII.
d. AGM Electronics, Model TA-4000.
e. Moore Industries, MIT 4-Channel.

K. Relays:

1. In PLC panels, provide interposing relays for signal isolation between external circuits and PLC discrete output (DO) modules.

2. Provided relays for incoming AC power and power supply failure alarms. Note that the relays mentioned here do not include motor contactors installed in MCCs, Control relays in the control panels shall be relays within panels shall Control Systems: Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components 17710-15 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17710 (DraftFinal) be of the “ice cube” style, which plug onto din rail mountable sockets. All relays of this type shall contain an LED illuminator, which indicated when the relay is energized. Relays shall be segregated by type, i.e., all PLC outputs relays shall be grouped together. PLC output interposing relays shall use 24 VDC as the coil operating voltage. Other types of relays within the panel should use 24 VDC as much as reasonably possible; however, 120 VAC relays can be used for purposes such as incoming power failure alarming. Relays installed for similia purposes should be from the same manufacturer to provide uniform appearance, operating characteristics, and spare parts inventory.

3. Other types of relays may be used, based upon purposes and load requirements.

4. General:
a. For all types of 120-VAC relays, provide surge protection across the coil of each relay.
b. For all types of 24-VDC relays, provide a free-wheeling diode across the coil of each relay.
c. For plug in type relays, provide a relay base from the same manufacturer as the relay manufacturer.

5. Control:
a. Magnetic style.
b. For use as standard control relay for motor and starter relay logic. c. NEMA ratings:
1) 300 volts.
2) 10 amps thermal continuous test current.
3) 60 amps make.
4) 6 amps break.
d. Plug-in type.
e. LED indication for energization status.
f. Coil voltages: As required for the application.
g. Minimum poles: DPDT.
h. Touch-safe design: Connection terminals to be protected against accidental touch.
i. Enclose each relay in a clear plastic heat and shock-resistant dust cover. j. Quantity and type of contact shall be as indicated on the Drawings or as needed for system compatibility.
k. Relays with screw-type socket terminals.
l. Provide additional relays when the following occurs:
1) Number or type of contacts shown exceeds the contact capacity of the specified relays.
2) Higher contact rating is required in order to interface with starter circuits or other equipment.
m. DIN rail mounting on 35-millimeter rail.
n. Ice-cube-type relays with retainer clips to secure relay in socket. o. Integrated label holder for device labeling.
p. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Allen-Bradley: Type 700 HC. (This was selected for Westbrook and Solaire.)
2) IDEC: R* Series (* = H, J, R, S, U).
3) Potter and Brumfield: Type KRP or KUP.
4) Square D: Type K.

6. Isolation:

Control Systems: Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components 17710-16 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17710 (DraftFinal) a. Electromechanical style.
b. For use as an interposing relay for PLC based discrete I/O signals. c. NEMA ratings:
1) Switching voltage: 250 volts AC/DC.
2) Limiting current: 6 amps continuous.
3) Interrupt: 1,500 volt-amperes.
d. Plug-in type.
e. LED indication for energization status.
f. Coil voltages: As required for the application.
g. Minimum poles: SPDT.
h. Touch-safe design: Connection terminals to be protected against accidental touch.
i. Quantity and type of contact shall be as indicated on the Drawings or as needed for system compatibility.
j. Relays with screw-type socket terminals.
k. DIN rail mounting on 35-millimeter rail.
l. Integrated label holder for device labeling.
m. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Allen-Bradley, Type 700 HL TBR Series.
2) Eaton, XR TBR Series.
3) IDEC, RV8H Series.
4) Phoenix Contact, PLC-INTERFACE Series.

7. Time delay:
a. Provide time-delay relays to control contact transition time. b. Contact rating:
1) 240 volts.
2) 10 amps continuous.
3) 3,600 volt-amperes make.
4) 360 volt-amperes break.
c. Coil voltage: As required for the application.
d. Provide pneumatic or electronic type with on-delay, off-delay, and on/off-delay:
1) For off-delay, use true power-off time-delay relays. Where the required timing range exceeds capability of the off-delay relay use, signal off-delay where power loss will not cause undesirable operation or pneumatic time-delay relays.
e. Minimum contacts: DPDT.
f. Units include adjustable dial with graduated scale covering the time range in each case.
g. Minimum timing range: 0.1 second to 10 minutes, or as required for the application.
h. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Allen-Bradley, Type 700-HR.
2) IDEC, RTE Series.
3) Tyco Electronics, Agastat 7000 Series (pneumatic).

L. Terminal blocks:

1. DIN rail mounting on 35-millimeter rail.

2. Rated for 15 amps at 600 volts.

3. The end user has adopted Spring Cage Clamp type. Screw terminal type shall not be utilized unless approved by the end user.

Control Systems: Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components 17710-17 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17710 (DraftFinal)

4. Provide mechanism to prevent wire connection from loosening in environments where vibration is present. This mechanism shall not cause permanent deformation to the metal body.

5. Finger-safe protection for terminals for conductors.

6. Construction: Polyamide insulation material capable of withstanding temperature extremes from -40 degrees to 221 degrees Fahrenheit.

7. Terminals: Plainly identified to correspond with markings on the diagrams:
a. Permanent machine-printed terminal identification.

8. Disconnect-type field signal conductor terminals with socket/screw for testing.

9. Identify terminals suitable for use with more than 1 conductor.

10. Position:
a. So that the internal and external wiring does not cross. b. To provide unobstructed access to the terminals and their conductors.

11. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Allen-Bradley, 1492-L Series.
b. Phoenix Contact, ST4 Series. (This was selected for Westbook and Solaire.)

12. Terminal block are grouped based upon purpose. The following terminal block designations shall be used to ensure uniformity in all panels. a. TB-1: 24 VDC Power (+) Bus.
b. TB-2: 24 VDC Common (-) Bus.
c. TB-3: 120 VAC L1 Bus.
d. TB-4: 120 VAC L2 Bus.
e. TB-5: Discrete Inputs.
f. TB-6: Discrete Outputs.
g. TB-7: Analog Inputs.
h. TB-8: Analog Outputs.
i. TB-9: 110VAC Instrument Source Bus.
j. TB-10 UPS Loads.

M. DIN rail grounding:

1. Grounding terminal blocks used exclusively for bonding each DIN rail section to panel grounding busbar shall:
a. Mount to DIN rail via grounding foot with mounting screw. b. Connect to the panel grounding busbar shall be via a green insulated conductor sized in accordance with NEC.
c. Not be used for grounding signal cable shields.

2. Screw terminal type.

3. DIN rail mounting on 35-millimeter rail.

4. Provide mechanism to prevent wire connection from loosening in environments where vibration is present. This mechanism shall not cause permanent deformation to the metal body.

5. Finger-safe protection for terminals for conductors.

6. Terminals: Plainly identified to correspond with markings on the diagrams:
a. Permanent machine-printed terminal identification.

7. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Allen-Bradley, 1492-LG Series.
b. Phoenix Contact, ST 4-PE Series. (This was selected for Westbrook and Solaire.)
N. Wire duct:

Control Systems: Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components 17710-18 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17710 (DraftFinal)

1. Provide flame retardant plastic wiring duct, slotted with dust cover.

2. Type:
a. Wide slot.
b. Narrow slot.
c. Round hole.

3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. ABB.
b. Iboco.
c. Panduit. (This was selected for Westbrook and Solaire.) d. Phoenix Contact.

O. DIN rail:

1. Perforated steel.

2. 35-mm width.

3. 15-mm deep.

4. Provide 2-inch offset using one of the following:
a. Offset brackets.
b. Preformed standoff DIN Rail Channel.

P. Surge protection devices (SPD):

1. 120 VAC control panel power SPD:
a. Provide SPD for all panel 120 VAC power entrances:
1) Non-faulting and non-interrupting design.
2) Provide line to neutral and neutral to ground surge protection. b. Provide surge protection at secondary of main circuit breaker:
1) Surge protection is not required for 120 VAC circuits that are only used for panel lights and receptacles.
2) For panels receiving power at 480 VAC, provide surge protection on the 120 VAC control power transformer secondary.
c. DIN rail mounting.
d. Attach wiring to the SPD by means of a screw-type cable-clamping terminal block:
1) Gastight connections.
2) Visual status indication of MOV status on the input and output circuits.
3) Dry contact rated for remote status indication.
e. Approvals:
1) Tested in accordance with IEC 61643-11.
2) Tested in accordance with UL 1283.
3) Tested in accordance with UL 1449.
4) Surge protection minimum requirements: Withstand a minimum 10-kA test current of an 8/20 µs waveform in accordance with IEEE C62.41.1 Category C Area.
f. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) ASCO, Model 277.
2) Phoenix Contact, Type SFP Filter. (This was selected for Westbrook and Solaire.)
3) Rockwell, 4983-DC series.
4) Sola HD, STFE Elite series.

2. 24 VDC control panel power SPD:
a. Provide SPD for 24 VDC power circuits.

Control Systems: Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components 17710-19 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17710 (DraftFinal) b. Provide surge protection at DC power supply output.
c. DIN rail mounting.
d. Attach wiring to the SPD by means of a screw-type cable clamping terminal block:
1) Optical status indicator.
2) Dry contact rated for remote status indication.
e. Approvals:
1) Tested in accordance with IEC 61643-11.
f. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Field instruments that require auxiliary power:
a) Emerson, Model 265 (SLAC) series.
b) Phoenix Contact, Plugtrab PLT--SEC-T3-24-FM-UT. (This was selected for Westbrook and Solaire.)
2) Loop powered field instruments:
a) Emerson/Edco, Model SS65-036-2.

3. Panel mounted control, signal, and data line SPD:
a. General:
1) This section applies to SPD located in a control panel, field panel, network junction box, or marshalling panel.
2) Approvals:
a) Tested in accordance with IEC 61643-21.
b) Tested in accordance with UL 497B.
3) SPD shall consist of 2 parts:
a) Base module:
(1) DIN rail mounting.
(a) Grounded to DIN rail via mounting rail foot.
b) Plug protection module:
(1) Replacing a plug shall not require the removal of any wires nor interrupt the signal.
4) Provide indirect shield ground style SPD unless otherwise noted. 5) Provide ability to locally identify and indicate SPD health. 6) SPD shall be provided with controller module with dry contact for remote status monitoring of SPD device health.
7) SPD modules shall be compatible with signal, communication bus type, data type, or control power being protected.
8) Provide dedicated SPD for each signal, communication bus type, or data line being protected.
b. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Dehn, Blitzductor XTU Series.
2) Phoenix Contact, Plugtrab PT-IQ Series. (This was selected for Westbrook and Solaire.)

4. Copper Ethernet SPD:
a. Protects network equipment from lightning or other surge events. b. Suitable for Gigabit networks.
c. Shielded RJ-45 ports.
d. Compliant with PoE standards IEEE 802.3af and 802.3at. e. Nominal discharge surge current: 10 kA.
f. Approvals:
1) Tested in accordance with IEC 61643-21.
2) Tested in accordance with UL 497B.
g. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

Control Systems: Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components 17710-20 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17710 (DraftFinal) 1) Citel, MJ8-C6A.
2) Eaton/MTL, ZoneBarrier High Energy Ethernet.
3) Phoenix Contact, DT-LAN-CAT6+.
4) Weidmuller, VDATA CAT6.

5. Field device mounted SPD:
a. Conduit entry mounting.
1) Provide parallel or through wiring configurations as required by the application.
a) Use parallel wiring configuration if there is an available cable gland at the device.
b) Use through wiring configuration if there is no available cable gland at the device.
2) Provide screw connections compatible with field device. b. NEMA 4X stainless steel material housing.
c. Approvals:
1) Tested in accordance with IEC 61643-21.
d. 4-wire field device:
1) Module shall provide simultaneous protection of signal cable, communication bus, or data line, and power supply line. a) Maximum continuous voltage:
(1) DC:
(a) Signal: 32 VDC.
(b) Power supply: 255 VDC.
(2) AC:
(a) Signal: 22.6 VAC.
(b) Power supply: 255 VAC.
2) Manufacturers: The following; Engineer knows of no equal:
a) Endress+Hauser, HAW569-CB2C.
e. 2-wire or 3-wire field device:
1) Module shall provide protection for the signal cable, communication bus or data line.
2) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a) Eaton/MTL, TP Series.
b) Endress+Hauser, HAW569 Series.
c) Phoenix Contact, Surgetrab S-PT Series.

Q. Horns and beacons:

1. Beacons/horn combination units:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Edwards, Multi-Status LED 108i with tone module.
2) Federal Signals, AV1ST Strobe Combination Audible/Visual Signal. b. LED Colors: Red, Green, and Amber.
c. Power: 120 VAC.
d. Provide accessories such as pipe mount flange, pipe extensions, corner mount brackets, or wall mount brackets as needed.
e. Horn rated 80 dB minimum at 10 feet.

2. Dedicated beacon unit:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Allen-Bradley, 855 B *-* 10 Series.
2) Edwards, 102 Series.
3) Federal Signal Corp., Starfire Series.

Control Systems: Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components 17710-21 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17710 (DraftFinal)

3. Dedicated horn unit:
a. Electromechanical:
1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a) Edwards, 878EX or 879EX Series.
b) Federal Signal, 350 or 31X Series.
b. Electronic:
1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a) Allen-Bradley, 855H or 855XH Series.
b) Edwards, 5530M or 5533MD Series.
c) Federal Signal, 300GCX or 300X Series.
c. Rated for 80 dB minimum at 10 feet.

R. Power supplies:

1. Configure power supply system so that either the primary or backup supply can be removed, repaired or replaced, and returned to service without disrupting the system operation.

2. Convert 120 VAC to 24-volt DC or other DC voltages required or as required for the application.

3. Provide redundant backup 24 VDC power supply units to automatically supply the load upon failure of the primary supply.

4. Provide power supply arrangement that is configured with several modules to supply adequate power in the event of a single module failure in either a 1+1 or N+1 configuration as required:
a. Provide automatic switchover upon module failure.
b. Alarm contacts monitored by the PLC.

5. Provide protective isolation between power supply units either by means of Diodes, Diode Modules, MOSFET Modules, or use power supplies with built in redundancy. Power supplies with built in redundancy must actively isolate each power supply and be designed as such.

6. Sized to provide 40-percent excess rated capacity.

7. UL 508 listed to allow full-rated output without de-rating.

8. Provide fuse or short-circuit protection.

9. Provide a minimum of 1 set of dry contacts for each power supply configured to change state on failure for monitoring and signaling purposes.

10. Output regulation: Within 0.05 percent for a 10-percent line change or a 50-percent load change.

11. Operating temperature range: 32 degrees to 140 degrees Fahrenheit.

12. Touch-safe design: Connection terminals to be protected against accidental touch.

13. DIN rail mounting on 35-millimeter rail:
a. Mount the power supply in the proper orientation as recommended by the manufacturer to ensure adequate thermal dispersion without derating the power supply.

14. Provide self-protecting power supplies with a means of limiting DC current in case of short circuit.

15. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Fully redundant:
1) IDEC, PS5R Series:
2) Phoenix Contact, Quint Power Supply with SFB technology. a) Phoenix Contact, Quint.
3) PULS. (This was selected for Westbrook and Solaire.) Control Systems: Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components 17710-22 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17710 (DraftFinal) 4) Sola.
b. Redundancy module:
1) Phoenix Contact, O-ring redundancy module. (This was selected for Westbrook and Solaire.)
S. Limit switches:

1. NEMA Type 4X.

2. AC contact rating 120 volts, 10 A.

3. DC contact rating 125 volts, 0.4 A.

4. Provide robust actuation mechanism not prone to degradation.

5. Provide complete actuator mechanism with required hardware.

6. Allows for contact opening even during contact weld condition.

7. UL approved.

8. Operating temperature range: 0 degrees to 230 degrees Fahrenheit).

9. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. ABB.
b. Allen-Bradley, 802 Series.
c. Eaton, E47, E49, E50.
d. Honeywell, HDLS Series.
e. Omron, D4 Series.

2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide panels with an inside protective pocket to hold the panel drawings. Ship panels with 1 copy of accepted Shop Drawings, including, but not limited to, schematic diagram, connection diagram, and layout drawing of control wiring and components in a sealed plastic bag stored in the panel drawing pocket.

B. Provide a folding shelf for enclosures that contain programmable controllers. Shelf shall be mounted on the inside surface of the door, capable of supporting a laptop computer.

C. Provide nameplate to each panel as indicated on the Drawings:

1. As specified in Section 16075 - Identification for Electrical Systems on internal and external instruments and devices.

2. With the following markings that is plainly visible after installation:
a. Manufacturer’s name, trademark, or other descriptive marking by which the organization responsible for the panel can be identified. b. Supply voltage, phase, frequency, and full-load current. c. Power source or circuit ID.
d. Short-circuit current rating of the panel based on one of the following:
1) A listed and labeled assembly.
2) Established utilizing an approved method.

D. Lighting:

1. Provide 1 luminaire for each section, on the interior of the panel, spaced evenly along the top-front of the enclosure door opening(s):
a. Covered or guarded.
b. Provide On-Off door-activated switches where indicated on the Drawings. c. 120-volt, single-phase, 15-amp style plug.
d. Provide 4,000 K, 900 lumens LED fixture.

Control Systems: Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components 17710-23 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17710 (DraftFinal) 1) Provide additional fixtures for every 36 inches of width.

E. Receptacles:

1. Provide 1 duplex receptacle located every 6 feet of enclosure width, spaced evenly along the back mounting panels.

2. GFCI, 120-volt, single-phase, 15-amp style plug.

3. Provide circuit breaker or fuse to limit receptacle draw to 5 amps.

F. Grounding:

1. Provide the following:
a. Grounding strap between enclosure doors and the enclosure. b. Equipment grounding conductor terminals.
c. Provide equipment grounding busbar with lugs for connection of equipment grounding wires.
d. Bond multi-section panels together with an equipment grounding conductor or an equivalent grounding busbar.

2. Identify equipment grounding conductor terminals with the word “GROUND,” the letters “GND”, the letter “G”, or the color green.

3. Signal cable shields shall only be grounded at a single point in the loop.

Unless otherwise noted, ground signal cable shields at control panel.

4. Ensure the continuity of the equipment grounding system by effective connections through conductors or structural members.

5. Design so that removing a device does not interrupt the continuity of the equipment-grounding circuit.

6. Provide an equipment-grounding terminal for each incoming power circuit, near the phase conductor terminal.

7. Size ground wires in accordance with NEC and UL Standards, unless noted otherwise.

8. Unless otherwise noted, connect exposed, noncurrent-carrying conductive parts, devices, and equipment to the equipment-grounding circuit.

9. Connect the door stud on the enclosures to an equipment-grounding terminal within the enclosure using an equipment-bonding jumper. a. Control panel ground lugs and ground bar shall be copper mechanical or compression connection type. Aluminum connectors or lugs are not acceptable for use with copper conductors.

G. Sunshades:

1. Provide panel-mounted sunshades for outdoor installations.

2. Provide thermally insulated standoff.

3. Provide deburred cutouts for access to exterior panel accessories.

4. Material of sunshade and mounting hardware shall match enclosure.

2.06 FINISHES
A. Finishes:

1. Metallic (non-stainless):
a. Metal surfaces of panels shall be prepared by chemical cleaning and mechanical abrasion in accordance with the finish manufacturer’s recommendations to achieve a smooth, well-finished surface.

Control Systems: Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components 17710-24 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17710 (DraftFinal) b. Scratches or blemishes shall be filled before finishing. 1 coat of zinc phosphate shall be applied according to the manufacturer’s recommended dry-film thickness and allowed to dry before applying the finish coat. c. Finish coat shall be a baked polyester-urethane powder, aliphatic air-dry polyurethane, or epoxy enamel to meet NEMA rating specified application. d. Exterior of enclosures located outdoors shall be UV-resistant polyester powder coating. Total dry film thickness shall be 3 mils, minimum.

2. Stainless steel:
a. Stainless enclosures shall be provided with a Number 4 brushed finish - not painted.

B. Colors:

1. Exterior color of panels mounted indoors shall be manufacturer’s standard light gray.

2. Exterior of panels mounted outdoors shall be manufacturer’s standard white.

3. Panel interiors shall be manufacturer’s standard white.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Equipment support and anchoring to structures:

1. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria, including, but not limited to:
a. Anchor bolt layout.
b. Equipment templates.
c. Anchor installation.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install enclosures so that their surfaces are plumb and level within 1/8-inch over the entire surface of the panel: Anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each corner, minimum. Direct attachment to drywall is not permitted.

B. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and anchorage details.

C. Provide floor stand kits for wall-mounted enclosures larger than 48-inches high.

D. Provide concrete housekeeping pads for freestanding enclosures.

1. Refer to the structural typical details.

E. Install gasket and sealing material under panels with floor slab cutouts for conduit:

1. Undercoat floor-mounted panels.

F. Provide a full-size equipment-grounding conductor in accordance with NEC included with the power feeder. Terminate to the incoming power circuit-grounding terminal.

G. Holes for field conduits, etc., shall be cut in the field. No additional holes, factory cut holes, or hole closers allowed. Incorrect holes, additional holes, or miscut holes shall require that the entire enclosure be replaced.

Control Systems: Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components 17710-25 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17710 (DraftFinal) H. Protect wiring from sharp edges and corners.

I. Control panels that are adjacent to motor control centers shall be fully wired to the motor control centers using wireways integral to the motor control center or additional conduits as needed. These interconnections are not shown or reflected on the Conduit Schedule but shall be shown on the loop drawings prepared by the Contractor.

J. Provide individually fused analog input module points with blown-fuse indicator lights, mounted external of the module on the output terminal strip.

K. Side panels:

1. Side panels shall be kept free of control equipment and devices. Any deviation must be sent to the Engineer in writing asking for a deviation.

3.03 COMMISSIONING
A. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

END OF SECTION

Control Systems: Uninterruptible Power Supplies 10 kVA and Below 17712-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17712 (DraftFinal) SECTION 17712
CONTROL SYSTEMS: UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES 10 KVA AND BELOW PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Single-phase double conversion uninterruptible power supplies rated 10 kVA and below.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. As specified in Sections 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical and 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Standards:

1. Federal Communications Commission (FCC):
a. FCC Part 15:
1) Class A.
2) Class B.
b. C62.41 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.

2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 V Maximum).

3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
a. UL 1778 - Standard for Uninterruptible Power Supply Systems and Equipment.

1.03 TERMINOLOGY
A. The words and terms listed below are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in this Section, have the indicated meaning.

1. Critical load: Load supplied by the UPS.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures and Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Product data:

1. Manufacturer and model number.

2. Catalog data.

3. Dimensions:
a. Height.
b. Width.
c. Depth.

Control Systems: Uninterruptible Power Supplies 10 kVA and Below 17712-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17712 (DraftFinal) d. Weight.

4. Ratings:
a. Input voltage.
b. Output voltage.
c. Input/output power factor.
d. Efficiency.
e. Harmonic distortion.
f. Runtime.

5. Noise specifications.

6. Heat dissipation.

7. Warranties and maintenance contracts:
a. Documentation to demonstrate conformance to Specifications noted in this Section.
b. Descriptive package of offerings of preventative and full-service maintenance contracts for both UPS system and batteries. c. Extended warranty options available.

8. Communications requirements such as software, cards, etc.

9. Alarms and status available for remote monitoring and system health.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Power distribution block diagrams.

2. Front and rear views of equipment enclosures:
a. Front elevation, including control and indicating devices.

3. Support points and weight of overall equipment.

4. Schematic and control wiring diagrams, including, but not limited to:
a. Line and load terminals.
b. Alarm and status terminals.
c. Manual maintenance bypass switch terminals.
d. External battery or step-down/step-up transformers, if any. e. External wiring requirements for communication signals.

5. Switching and overcurrent protective devices.

D. Calculations:

1. Include derating for temperature and elevation as necessary.

2. UPS sizing computation:
a. Apply safety factors as specified in this Section.
b. Provide itemized list of critical loads, including individual VA and watt ratings.

3. Battery time calculation based on specified runtime for total load with the safety factor multiplied to it. Table/graph for back-up time calculation.

4. Load calculation shall include power for all shown in the power distribution drawing, which includes, but is not limited to, PLC power supply, field instruments (120 VAC and 24 VDC), instrument power, Ethernet switches, and I/O modules. Refer to network drawings for additional information and notes.

5. Total battery recharge time as a function of capacity utilized.

E. Design data:

1. Design mounting and anchorage for seismic design criteria specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria:
a. Provide seismic kits as required to meet design criteria.

Control Systems: Uninterruptible Power Supplies 10 kVA and Below 17712-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17712 (DraftFinal) F. Record documents:

1. Provide record drawings of installed unit(s), including layout and wiring.

G. Manufacturer’s field reports.

H. Operation and maintenance manuals:

1. As specified in Section 01782 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

2. System instruction manuals that describe troubleshooting, installation, operations, and safety procedures.

3. Recommendations for maintenance procedures and intervals.

4. Battery data/replacement information.

5. Parts list.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer qualifications:

1. A minimum of 10 years’ experience in the design, manufacture, and testing of solid-state UPS systems.

2. ISO 9001 certified.

B. Regulatory requirements for complete UPS system:

1. UL listed in accordance with UL 1778.

2. IEEE C62.41, Category B.

3. FCC 15:
a. Greater than 2,000 VA - Class A.
b. Less than 2,000 VA - Class B.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.08 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide complete, factory-assembled, wired, and tested, true on-line double conversion UPS equipment, including, but not limited to, rectifier, DC bus, inverter, battery charger, batteries, automatic bypass, and ancillary components as specified in this Section.

B. The Uninterruptable Power Supplies (UPS) shall be used to power critical panel components, PLCs, communication equipment, etc. In general all circuits within the Control Systems: Uninterruptible Power Supplies 10 kVA and Below 17712-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17712 (DraftFinal) panel, with the exception of convenience outlets, temperature control systems, and panel fluorescent lighting should be powered from the UPS.

C. UPS’s location in outdoor enclosures shall be rated to operate in temperatures up to 40 degrees Celsius, regardless whether the enclosure in air conditioned or not.

D. UOS’s shall be sized such that 120 VAC power is maintained within the panel for a minimum of 30 minutes after loss of source power. The UPS shall be provided with outputs wired to the local PLC to monitor: UPS online, low battery, UPS in bypass mode, and UPS fail alarms. UPSs shall be provided with maintenance bypass switches to allow maintenance on the UPS without disturbing panel power.

2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Critical loads as indicated on the Drawings.

2.03 MANUFACTURERS
A. Double conversion true online UPS system:

1. One of the following or equal:
a. Eaton, 9PX Series.
b. Vertiv, Liebert GXT5 Series.

2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Design requirements:

1. Minimum VA rating of the UPS shall be greater than or equal to the safety factor (as indicated in the UPS schedule) times the connected load or 700 VA, whichever is greater.

2. UPS system input:
a. Voltage:
1) Less than or equal to 3 kVA UPS:
a) 120 VAC within 3 percent, single-phase, 2-wire plus ground (L1, N, G).
2) Greater than 3 kVA UPS:
a) 208 VAC within 5 percent, single-phase, 3-wire plus ground (L1, L2, N, G).
3) Frequency: 60 hertz:
a) Auto sensing on initial power up.
b) User configurable.
b. Current harmonic distortion (THDi%):
1) Less than or equal to 5 percent at full load operation. c. Power factor:
1) Greater than or equal to 0.99 lagging at rated load. d. Connections:
1) As specified and as indicated on the Drawings.

3. Mounting:
a. Configurable for rack and tower mounting applications. b. Provide manufacturer’s standard mounting kit as required by the application.

Control Systems: Uninterruptible Power Supplies 10 kVA and Below 17712-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17712 (DraftFinal)

4. Cooling:
a. UPS shall have integral forced air cooling.

5. Output connections:
a. Receptacles:
1) Less than or equal to 3 kVA UPS:
a) Provide a minimum of four NEMA Type 5-15R or Type 5-20R receptacles.
b) Provide at least one NEMA Type L5-30R receptacle.
2) Greater than 3 kVA UPS:
a) Provide a minimum of four NEMA Type 5-20R receptacles. b) Provide at least one NEMA Type L14-30R receptacle.
3) Provide hardwired connections as required and as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Environmental requirements:

1. Operating ambient temperature:
a. UPS module: 50 degrees Fahrenheit to 104 degrees Fahrenheit (10 degrees Celsius to 40 degrees Celsius).
b. Battery: 68 degrees Fahrenheit to 86 degrees Fahrenheit (20 degrees Celsius to 30 degrees Celsius).

2. Operating altitude:
a. Project Site conditions as specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

3. Surge protection:
a. UPS shall be accordance with IEEE C62.41, Category B.

4. Audible noise:
a. Less than 46 dB at 1 meter.

C. Communications:

1. Relay outputs:
a. Provide low voltage signals for On Battery, Low Battery, Any Mode Shutdown, and Battery Mode Shutdown.
b. Connections on a terminal block on the rear panel.

2. Serial:
a. RS-232 serial connection.

3. USB:
a. Provide a USB connection that is HID compliant for network connection.

2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. External maintenance bypass:

1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Eaton, HotSwap MBP Series.
b. Vertiv, Liebert Micropod Series.

2. Properties:
a. Provides isolation of the UPS for maintenance purposes. b. Provide maintenance bypass from the same manufacturer as the UPS manufacturer.
c. UL 1778 listed.
d. Provide manufacturer’s recommended mounting kit as required by the application.

Control Systems: Uninterruptible Power Supplies 10 kVA and Below 17712-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17712 (DraftFinal) e. Make-before-break design so that UPS can be isolated from the critical loads by placing these loads on source power without interruption of operation.
f. Utility and UPS status indications.
g. Rated to carry the full input current of the UPS.
h. Connections to match UPS connections and as indicated on the Drawings.
i. Supply necessary input/output cords and receptacles for connections with power source and UPS.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Do not utilize extension cords, adapters, or other electrical connectors for UPS input.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform inspections and test procedures before UPS startup:

1. Inspect equipment for signs of damage.

2. Verify installation as indicated on the Drawings and specified in the Specifications.

3. Inspect cabinets for foreign objects.

4. Verify neutral and ground conductors are properly sized and terminated.

5. Inspect battery cases.

6. Inspect batteries for proper polarity.

7. Check power and control wiring for tightness.

8. Check terminal connectors for tightness.

9. Ensure connection and voltage of the battery string(s).

3.03 SCHEDULES
Tag
Minimum
Runtime
Input Voltage/
Connection
Safety
Factor Notes
WD31-UPSX-30101 30min 120VAC/5-15P 1.5 Control Panel
WD31-PLCP-30101
WD31-UPSX-36101 30min 120VAC/5-15P 1.5 Control Panel
WD31-PLCP-36101

END OF SECTION
Control Systems: Programmable Logic Controllers
17720-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17720 (DraftFinal) SECTION 17720
CONTROL SYSTEMS: PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Programmable logic controller (PLC) based control systems hardware.

2. Development software to be used with the specified PLC hardware.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Abbreviations:

1. CPU: Central processing unit.

2. I/O: Input/Output.

C. Standards:

1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).

1.03 TERMINOLOGY
A. The words and terms listed below are not defined terms that require initial capital letters, but, when used in this Section, have the indicated meaning.

1. Application software: Software that is programmed specifically for the Project.

2. Development operating software: Software provided by the PLC manufacturer for use in programming the PLC.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures and 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Product data:

1. CPU:
a. Processor type.
b. Processor speed.
c. Memory.
d. Internal processor battery backup time.

2. I/O modules:
a. Type.
b. Standard wiring diagram.

3. Programming languages.

4. Operating system requirements.

Control Systems: Programmable Logic Controllers
17720-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17720 (DraftFinal) C. Calculations:

1. Calculations or documented estimate to verify that memory requirements of this Section are met, including spare requirements. If possible, use the PLC manufacturer’s calculation or estimating worksheet.

2. Calculations to verify that spare I/O requirements of this Section are met.

3. Calculations to verify that PLC power supply requirements of this Section are met.

D. Control logic:

1. Fully annotated copy of programmed PLC logic.

2. Cross-referenced index of PLC registers or points.

E. Provide application software for the specific Project process requirements:

1. Fully annotated copy of programmed PLC logic in its native format.

2. Cross-referenced index of PLC registers or points.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Provide PLC hardware manufactured at facilities certified to the quality standards of ISO 9001.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.08 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

1.09 MAINTENANCE
A. Furnish the following if part of the original design:

1. CPU: 1 spare for each type of CPU in the system.

2. I/O cards: 3 spares for each type of I/O card in the system.

3. Power supplies: 2 spares for every power supply in the system.

4. Network/communications cards: 1 spare for every network or communications card in the system.

5. Communication cable: 1 spare for each type of cable used in the system.

Control Systems: Programmable Logic Controllers
17720-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17720 (DraftFinal) B. Installed spare requirements:

1. I/O points:
a. Provide total of 25 percent spare I/O capacity for each type of I/O at every PLC/RIO rack using the following calculation:
�1 − UTILIZED IO POINT COUNT
TOTAL IO POINT COUNT � ∗ 100 = %SPARE
b. Wire spare I/O points to field terminal blocks in the same enclosure the PLC/RIO resides in.

2. PLC backplane capacity:
a. Provide 25 percent or 3 spare backplane slots, whichever is greater, in racks containing I/O.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide PLC hardware as specified in this Section.

2.02 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Provide PLC system components by a single manufacturer:

1. Third-party communication modules may be used only for communication or network media functions not provided by the PLC manufacturer.

B. Use PLC manufacturer approved hardware, such as cable, mounting hardware, connectors, enclosures, racks, communication cable, splitters, terminators, and taps.

C. PLC hardware, CPUs, I/O devices, and communication devices shall be new, free from defects, and produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of these products.

D. Wherever possible, use the same model of each PLC module type throughout the Project.

2.03 MANUFACTURERS
A. The following, no equal:

1. Modicon:
a. M340, BMXP3420 Series.

2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Programmable logic controller:

1. PLC power supply:
a. Model: BMXCPS – Standalone.
b. Input: 120 VAC.
c. Sized to power modules mounted in that housing including an average module load for any empty housing slots plus 50 percent above that total.

Control Systems: Programmable Logic Controllers
17720-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17720 (DraftFinal)

2. PLC input/output, I/O modules:
a. Discrete input modules:
1) Model: BMX-DDI-1602.
2) 24VDC.
3) Isolated channels.
4) 20 pin terminal block.
b. Discrete output modules:
1) Model: BMX-DRA-1605.
2) Relay.
3) 16 relay channels.
4) 20 pin terminal block.
c. Analog input modules:
1) Model: BMX-AMI-0810.
2) Signal type: Provide 4-20 mA for most applications; other levels are acceptable to interface to vendor control panels.
3) Analog-to-digital conversion: Minimum 12-bit precision with the digital result entered into the processor.
4) The analog-to-digital conversion updated with each scan of the processor.
5) Individually isolated each input.
6) Coordinate the size of the external fuse with the protection located on the module, so that the external fuse opens first under a fault condition.
d. Analog output modules:
1) Model: BMX-AMO-0410.
2) Signal type: Provide 4-20 mA for most applications; other levels are acceptable to interface to vendor control panels.
3) Individual isolated output points each rated for loads of up to 1,000 ohms.

3. Communications modules:
a. Network communications modules:
1) General:
a) Install communications modules in the PLC backplane external to the PLC housing.
2) Modbus:
a) Model: BMX-NOE-01x0.
b) Ports: 1 RJ-45.
c) Communication rate: 100 Mbit/s.
3) Ethernet:
a) Model: BMX-NOC-0401.
b) Ports: 4 RJ45.
4) Provide all network taps, connectors, termination resistors, drop cables, and trunk cables necessary for remote I/O communications.

4. PLC backplane housing:
a. Model: BMEXBP – Dual Ethernet and X bus rack.
b. Mount the PLC power supply, CPU, communications module, and I/O modules in a suitable standard PLC backplane or housing. c. Provide spare slots in each PLC and RIO location in accordance with the requirements of this Section.
d. Provide a blank slot filler module for each spare slot.

Control Systems: Programmable Logic Controllers
17720-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17720 (DraftFinal) B. PLC programming software:

1. PLC software shall be Modicon, Control Expert v14.1.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Utilize personnel to accomplish or supervise the physical installation of all elements, components, accessories, or assemblies:

1. Employ installers who are skilled and experienced in the installation and connection of all elements, components, accessories, and assemblies.

C. All components of the control system, including data network cables, are the installation responsibility of the ICSC unless specifically noted otherwise.

D. Control system logic program shall reside at the PLC level.

E. Use the tag and loop identifications found on the P&IDs for all tags used and/or assigned as part of the application software work provided by the ICSC.

3.02 COMMISSIONING
A. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

B. Owner Training:

1. As specified in Section 17950 - Commissioning for Instrumentation and Controls.

END OF SECTION

Control Systems: PCS Computer Equipment
17730-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17730 (DraftFinal) SECTION 17730
CONTROL SYSTEMS: PCS COMPUTER EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. PC-based PCS system hardware, including:
a. Operator workstations (thin clients).
b. Industrial LCD monitors.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Specific definitions:

1. CAL: Client access license.

2. RAID: Redundant array of independent disks.

3. SNMP: Simple network management protocol.

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide all PCS computer equipment identified in the Contract Documents.

B. Miscellaneous requirements:

C. All Material used in satisfying the equipment requirements shall be new and unused and must be actively marketed by the original equipment manufacturer for new applications at the time of the factory demonstration test. The Contractor shall not use equipment destined for installation or spare parts for the Owner’s system for any reason other than development and testing of the system.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Sections 01330 - Submittal Procedures and 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

Control Systems: PCS Computer Equipment
17730-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17730 (DraftFinal)

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.09 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Workstations (Thin Client):

1. Manufacturers: the following no equal:
a. Dell, Wyse 5070.

2. General:
a. General purpose, PC-architecture thin computers. Operating system shall be Ubuntu 20.04 operating system as coordinated with the Owner. b. Thin workstation.
c. Form factor: Mini.
d. Processor: Pentium Silver J5005.
e. Memory: 16GB eMMC.
f. Network card: 10/100/1000-Base-TX.
g. Ports:
1) 4 USB 2.0.
2) 1 RJ-45.
3) 2 DVI or DisplayPort.
h. Mouse:
1) Optical.
2) Wheel-type, 3-button (count wheel click as one button). 3) Wired.
4) A touchpad mouse is NOT acceptable.
i. Keyboard: Windows 104-key.
1) Full-size.
2) A touch pad is NOT acceptable.
j. Color: Black.
k. Folding vertical mounted keyboard and mouse rack.
1) Manufacturers (or equal):
a) Rack Solutions: Model 104-4846.

Control Systems: PCS Computer Equipment
17730-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17730 (DraftFinal) B. LED monitor:

1. LED panel mounted monitors shall meet the following minimum requirements:
a. LED manufacturers: the following no equal:
1) Hope Industrial Systems, HISML23.8-STTC.
b. Viewing area: 23.8 inches.
c. Aspect ratio: 16:9.
d. Resolution: 1920 x 1080, 16.7 million colors.
e. Interface:
1) Digital Visual Interface connectors (DVI-I).
2) DisplayPort.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. General:

1. Install equipment and cabling so that, in the event of an earthquake, seismic movement will not damage cables. In particular, provide appropriate slack in cables.

C. Each device with a unique IP address shall be individually labeled with its IP address.

The labeling must be printed; Handwritten labels will not be accepted.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. As specified in Section17950 - Commissioning for Instrumentation and Controls.

3.03 CLEANING
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

3.04 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Training:

1. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

END OF SECTION

Control Systems: Network Materials and Equipment
17733-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17733 (DraftFinal) SECTION 17733
CONTROL SYSTEMS: NETWORK MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Materials and equipment used in process control and LAN networks, including:
a. Network switches.
b. Patch panels and other data network hardware.
c. Related accessories.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Standards:

1. Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA):
a. 310-E - Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment.

2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):
a. 802.1X - Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks—Port-Based Network Access Control.
b. 802.3 - Standard for Ethernet.
c. 802.11b - Standard for Information Technology - Telecommunications and information exchange between systems - Local and Metropolitan networks - Specific requirements - Part 11: Wireless LAN Medium Access Control (MAC) and Physical Layer (PHY) specifications: Higher Speed Physical Layer (PHY) Extension in the 2.4 GHz band.

3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 V Maximum).

4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).

5. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA):
a. 569 - Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.
b. 607 - Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer Premises.

6. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

1.03 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. As specified in Section 01357 - Delegated Design Procedures.

B. Anchoring and bracing.

Control Systems: Network Materials and Equipment
17733-2 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17733 (DraftFinal)

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product data:

1. Include information on all network equipment.

2. Manufacturer’s operation and installation instructions.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Complete set of drawings, including, but not limited to:
a. System block diagram showing relationship and connections between devices provided under this Contract, including connections to any existing equipment.
b. Include manufacturer and model information, and address settings. c. Network riser diagram.
d. Network port diagram, which physically locates all ports within the facility, and identifies their patch panel and switch port.
e. Construction drawings for equipment cabinets, including dimensions, identification of components, preparation and finish data, and nameplates. f. Electrical connection diagrams.
g. Complete grounding requirements.

2. Furnish data sheets for each component together with a technical product brochure or bulletin:
a. Manufacturer’s model number.
b. Project equipment tag.

3. Complete and detailed bills of materials broken up by each cabinet. Each bill of material item will include the following:
a. Quantity.
b. Description.
c. Manufacturer.
d. Part numbers.

D. Delegated Design Submittals:

1. Anchoring and bracing: Provide project-specific calculations based on support conditions and requirements to resist loads specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.
a. To structures for equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C, D, E, or F.

E. Calculations:

1. Cooling calculations, including, but not limited to:
a. Highest expected ambient temperature for the enclosure’s location. b. Internal heat load.
c. Exposure to direct sunlight.
d. Dimensions of the enclosure in inches.
e. Maximum allowable temperature inside the enclosure, based on the lowest operating temperature limit of the installed components.

F. Test reports:

1. As specified in Section 16125 - Fiber Optic Cable and Appurtenances and Section 17950 - Commissioning for Instrumentation and Controls.

Control Systems: Network Materials and Equipment
17733-3 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17733 (DraftFinal)

2. Signed test results as described in this Section.

3. Test results shall include:
a. Narrative describing the test procedures followed.
b. Block diagram of test set up.
c. Manufacturer’s information on test equipment used.
d. Detailed test results.
e. A narrative summarizing the results of the testing and identifying any further action required.

G. Operating manuals:

1. Complete installation, operation, calibration, and testing manuals as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

H. Record drawings:

1. As specified in Section 17950 - Commissioning for Instrumentation and Controls.

2. Electrical connection diagrams shall be revised to reflect any changes made in the field and submitted as record drawings.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

1.06 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 01850 - Design Criteria.

1.07 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 01783 - Warranties and Bonds.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Vendor shall manufacture using low VOC-based materials to provide superior indoor air quality demonstrated by Greenguard certification.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. As listed below in the individual component paragraphs.

2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Ethernet switches:

1. Managed Process Floor Ethernet switches:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following, no equal:
1) Aruba:
a) 12 Port Switch, Model: R8N89A.

Control Systems: Network Materials and Equipment
17733-4 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17733 (DraftFinal) 2) Mounting:
a) Shelf.

B. Patch panels:

1. Fiber optic patch panels:
a. General:
1) Optical fiber cables shall be provided with strain relief and terminated at a fiber patch panel. Final connections between the patch panel and the fiber optic network equipment shall be made via factory tested fiber optic patch cords.
2) Fiber cable strands shall be terminated at the patch panels; no loose fiber strands are allowed.
3) Provide space for excess fiber and provide strain relief for the fiber cable.
4) Fiber cables shall be installed such that the outer sheath of the cable is carried into the interconnect enclosure or patch panels before breaking out buffer tubes.
5) Fiber connectors: LC.
b. DIN-rail mounted:
1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a) Corning.
b) DINSpace, SNAP Cu. (This was selected for Westbrook and Solaire.)
c) Hirschmann, MIPP.
2) Properties:
a) Use for the termination of a single cable inside of cabinets, in small enclosures or as indicated on the plans.
b) DIN-rail mounted fiber patch panels shall be provided as a complete unit, including the housing, connector panels, splice trays, and fiber connectors.

2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide duplex patch cords to connect the interface cards provided with the associated patch panels.

B. Provide dust covers or plugs for unused ports.

C. Furnish accessories as specified in Section 17730 - Control Systems: PCS Computer Equipment.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

B. Provide installation and configuration for the new and existing managed Ethernet switches. Provide configuration of the Ethernet switch network for a complete, Control Systems: Network Materials and Equipment
17733-5 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17733 (DraftFinal) functioning plant control system as indicated on the Drawings and as specified in this Section:

1. Refer to Network Connection diagram for all new network connections.

2. Provide configuration for the managed Ethernet switch listed in 2.03.

3. The Process floor managed Ethernet switches for the process control network shall be configured and programmed for rapid fail over protection.

C. All Work shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner.

1. Ground enclosure and equipment in accordance with TIA-607. a. Individually bond all network equipment chassis to rack’s grounding busbar. Do not daisy-chain bonding conductors.
b. Size the bonding conductor per network equipment manufacturer’s recommendation, or #10 AWG, whichever is larger.

D. All Cables and terminations shall be labeled with cable designations as specified in Section 16075 - Identification for Electrical Systems.

E. Each data port shall be individually labeled with its patch panel/switch port ID:

1. Labeling must be printed - No handwritten labels will be allowed.

F. At the completion of the wiring installation, provide the following documentation:

1. A plan-view of the premise(s) showing the jack numbering scheme.

2. A printed certification report for the entire wiring installation showing compliance with all TIA specifications for data cable.

3. Reports such as those generated by Fluke DSP cable certification equipment meet this requirement.

G. Managed Ethernet switches:

1. Configure switches to prevent broadcast storms.

2. All Installations shall employ IGMP snooping to limit multicast messaging.

3.02 ADJUSTING
A. Perform all firmware installations, configuration, and other set up, as required, to place the network into proper operation.

3.03 CLEANING
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

3.04 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. As specified in Section 17050 - Common Work Results for Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.

Control Systems: Network Materials and Equipment
17733-6 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17733 (DraftFinal) B. After completion of the cable system tests and before placing the system in operation, power up all devices installed on the LAN and verify communication between the devices.

C. Verify that all equipment is operable on the network simultaneously. Confirm that all network device communications settings are properly configured.

END OF SECTION
Schedules: I/O List
17903-1 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17903 (DraftFinal) SECTION 17903
SCHEDULES: I/O LIST
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. The I/O list is not a take-off list. Additional information is as indicated on the Drawings and specified in the Contract Documents. Where any discrepancies between this list and the P&ID drawings arise, the P&ID shall govern.

B. Abbreviations used in the I/O list are indicated on the Drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 I/O LIST
A. As specified in Attachment A - I/O list.

END OF SECTION

Schedules: I/O List
17903-Attachment A 11843A10 December 2024 - DRAFT FINAL pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/CA/Roseville/11843A10/X P3 Design/Specifications/17903 (DraftFinal) ATTACHMENT A – I/O LIST

PLC I/O Listing for WD31-PLCX-30101
Drawing Tag I/O Location Description Service (E/F)
13N04 WD33-LIXX-30201 AI WD31-PLCX-30101 LEVEL SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE STORAGE TANK LEVEL ELEMENT WD31-PLCX-3 Total AI Points = 1
13N04 WD33-LIXX-30202 DI WD31-PLCX-30101 LEAK TANK LEAK DETECTION SWITCH WD31-PLCX-3 Total DI Points = 1
13GN05 WD31-TIXX30101AI WD31-PLCX-30101 TEMP PLC AUX POWER 13N01 WD34-FIXX30105AI WD31-PLCX-30101 FLOW ASR WELL PUMP PRELUBE/TRICKLE FLOW ELEMENT 13N01 WD34-PIXX30122AI WD31-PLCX-30101 PRESS NITROGEN PRESSURE GAUGE 13N02 WD34-PIXX30102AI WD31-PLCX-30101 PRESS ASR WELL RECOVERY PRESSURE ELEMENT 13N02 WD34-PIXX30109AI WD31-PLCX-30101 PRESS ASR WELL STORAGE PRESSURE ELEMENT 13N02 WD34-ZX-30120 AI WD31-PLCX-30101 POSITION WELL ANNULUS RECHARGE VALVE 13N03 WD34-PDXX30151AI WD31-PLCX-30101 PRESS DIFF H-STRAINER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 13N03 WD34-PIXX30106AI WD31-PLCX-30101 PRESS STORAGE LINE PRESSURE ELEMENT 13N03 WD34-ZXXX30150AI WD31-PLCX-30101 POSITION RECHARGE CONTROL VALVE 13N05 WD33-SIXX30313AI WD31-PLCX-30101 SPEED IN SODIUM FLUORIDE FEED PUMP 13N06 WD33-AIXX30205AI WD31-PLCX-30101 CHLORINE CHLORINE RESIDUAL ANALYZER 13N06 WD33-AIXX30206AI WD31-PLCX-30101 pH pH ANALYZER
13N06 WD33-AIXX30307AI WD31-PLCX-30101 FLUORIDE FLUORIDE ANALYZER 13N06 WD33-LIXX-30401 AI WD31-PLCX-30101 LEVEL COMW-C WELL WATER LEVEL WD31-PLCX-3 Total AI Points = 14
13N02 WD34-ZCX-30120 AO WD31-PLCX-30101 POSITION WELL ANNULUS RECHARGE VALVE 13N03 WD34-ZCXX30150AO WD31-PLCX-30101 POSITION RECHARGE CONTROL VALVE 13N05 WD33-SCXX30313AO WD31-PLCX-30101 SPEED OUT SODIUM FLUORIDE FEED PUMP WD31-PLCX-3 Total AO Points = 3
12/11/2024

Page 1 of 5 ends
← All documents from this meeting